Operating Manual - technical audio

Operating Manual - technical audio
Operating Manual
Copyright © 1992
All Rights Reserved
Manual No. 73A020-H
Preface
Assistance and Information
TimeLine
Technical Support
1755 La Costa Meadows Drive
Suite B
San Marcos, CA 92069
Phone: (760) 761-4440
Fax:
(760) 761-4449
Software Version
Serial Number
SUPPORT@TIMELINEVISTA.COM
Technical Assistance is available ONLY if the Lynx-2 is
registered. Mail in your Warranty Card immediately to register
the Lynx-2.
Remember; when calling for technical support, you must provide
the software version and Lynx-2 serial number. This will enable
us to give you accurate and prompt assistance.
Copyright and Printing History
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system,
or transmitted, in any form, or by any means electronically, mechanical, photocopying, recording
or otherwise, without the prior written permission of TimeLine Vista, Inc.
Each revision will cause the letter to the right of the manual part number to change. The
purpose for each revision will be listed below. Events such as the addition of a feature or
functional test will cause the revision number to change.
Internal Document Number: 73K023 Revision H
ii
Revision Number
B
Approval Date
12/1/92
Serial No. Affected
N/A
C
12/8/92
N/A
D
12/18/92
N/A
E
1/18/93
N/A
F
2/19/93
N/A
G
4/5/93
N/A
H
9/15/94
Changes Made
Table of Contents added and
Miscellaneous editing changes.
Rack Mount Instruction Change and
Miscellaneous editing changes.
KCU Modifications to Installation,
Getting Started and Appendix.
Single Rack Mount Instructions,
Bulkhead Information and
Miscellaneous additions and editing
changes.
Revise Features and Controls
section, add Film Module in
Advanced Features section, and
miscellaneous editing changes.
Add Circuit Board Interface to
Appendix and miscellaneous
additions and editing changes.
Complete rewrite with V700-10
software release
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Preface
Limited Warranty
TimeLine Vista, Inc. (TimeLine), warrants this product against defects in material or
workmanship as follows:
1.
For a period of ninety (90) days from the date of purchase TimeLine will at its option,
either perform necessary repairs at our expense or pay the labor charges of others it
authorizes to repair the defective product. After the initial 90 day period labor
charges are the responsibility of the purchaser.
2.
In addition TimeLine will supply at no charge, new or rebuilt replacements for
defective parts for a period of one (1) year from the date of purchase.
Labor and Parts
To obtain warranty service, the purchaser must notify TimeLine in writing during the
initial ninety (90) day period. TimeLine will then authorize the purchaser to take or
deliver, prepaid, the product to TimeLine or it's authorized Service Center.
Parts Only
During the remainder of the warranty period, any defective part will be replaced if the
purchaser delivers/sends the product, prepaid to TimeLine. Labor incurred in the repair is
at the purchaser's expense.
This Warranty does not cover any damage due to accident, misuse, abuse, or negligence.
We suggest that the purchaser retain the dated sales receipt as evidence of the original
date of purchase.
This warranty is not transferable and applies only to the original, registered purchaser.
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS THE
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE PURCHASER. TIMELINE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, EXCEPT WHERE
PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, OR AS DESCRIBED IN THE LIMITED
WARRANTY ABOVE. TIMELINE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
USA: Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential
damages, or allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above
limitation and exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
rights and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
iii
Preface
Safety
To assist identification of potentially hazardous circumstances or
procedures, warnings and cautions will be displayed with the appropriate text. Occasionally, information that provides an enhanced understanding of the text will be provided as a Note.
Note
A Note provides information about or an explanation of a topic
related to the subject being discussed.
Warning
Warnings describe a procedure that if not followed as specified could potentially
cause damage to the equipment, a loss of data, or create an error condition.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER. NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
iv
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Preface
Manual Contents and Use
To those who have never owned a TimeLine Time Code Module:
Every effort has been made to make this a concise and understandable reference. Sophisticated transport control is one of the
more complicated technologies that audio/video engineers, technicians and operators have to deal with.
While maintaining power and flexibility, TimeLine has made the
intricacies of the Lynx-2 module transparent to the user.
Lynx-2 will be of little value if you do not invest some time to familiarize yourself with the unit's interface and operational procedures. Do not hesitate to call us if you are confused about a
particular feature, application or function. But first, PLEASE
READ THE MANUAL!
Introduction
Provides a high level overview of the Lynx-2 system and a broad
feature list.
Applications
Presents common applications and configurations for Lynx-2,
audio, video and MIDI equipment.
Installation
Describes how to install and configure the Lynx-2 system for your
specific application.
Getting Started
Presents initialization, start up procedures, and basic operating
instructions.
Troubleshooting
Describes methods to verify that your system is correctly installed
and troubleshooting procedures to isolate parts of the system
which may be incorrectly configured or installed.
Features and Controls
Contains a description of the basic operational features of the
Lynx-2. The descriptions are grouped by function.
Time Code Generator
Describes in detail how to set up and operate the SMPTE/EBU
time code generator.
Time Code Reader
Provides detailed operating information for the SMPTE/EBU time
code reader.
Sync & Resolver
Provides detailed operating information for the transport
synchronizer or resolver.
Advanced Features
Provides detailed operating information for some advanced
synchronization applications.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
v
Preface
Appendix
Time Code Overview
A review of how and why the various SMPTE/EBU time code
formats evolved, what they mean and how they impact the production process.
Quick Reference & Cable Reference Guide
Provides setup and cabling information to help configure and use
the Lynx-2.
Keyboard Control Unit Modifications
Provides Service Bulletin (SB91-003) modification instructions for
the KCU.
Glossary
An alphabetic list of common terms used throughout the manual
and in the industry in general.
Technical Information
Provides various tables, schematics and other technical
information that may be helpful.
Typography Conventions Used
This manual uses the following Typographical conventions.
Press
Press a key, generally a movement key or function key such as
[CLR].
Select
Press or adjust the indicated key or knob to obtain a result or
display
You see
A key word, indicator, or number that you can see on the front or
rear panel or display.
[CLR]
This indicates a particular key on the front or back panel of the
Lynx-2, such as the clear key in this example.
{BWL}
This indicates a Lynx-2 front panel key shifted or menu function.
For example, {BWL} is the [SHIFT] and [GEN REF] keys.
LED
This is one of the lights on the front panel. LED means Light
Emitting Diode.
Key
Each of the buttons, switches or keys on the front panel that you
press to cause something to happen.
vi
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction
What is the Lynx-2 Time Code Module?............................................................................... 1-1
Features................................................................................................................................. 1-2
System Overview................................................................................................................... 1-6
Specifications......................................................................................................................... 1-9
Chapter 2 Applications
Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 2-1
Resolving a Single Machine .................................................................................................. 2-2
Resolve and Lock ................................................................................................................... 2-3
Chase Synchronization - Audio as Master............................................................................ 2-4
Chase Synchronization - Video ............................................................................................. 2-5
Post Production - Audio......................................................................................................... 2-6
Adding an ATR to a Video Editor ......................................................................................... 2-8
Lynx System Supervisor ....................................................................................................... 2-9
Keyboard Control Unit.........................................................................................................2-10
Console Control Unit............................................................................................................2-11
Remote Motion Controller....................................................................................................2-12
Jog/Shuttle Wheel ................................................................................................................2-13
Chapter 3 Installation
Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 3-1
System Setup Planning ......................................................................................................... 3-1
Part I - Installation ............................................................................................................... 3-2
Part II - Interface Diagrams ................................................................................................3-15
Chase Synchronizer - Audio .................................................................................................3-16
Chase Synchronizer - Video .................................................................................................3-16
Biphase Slave Under External Control ...............................................................................3-17
Biphase Master Under External Control ............................................................................3-17
KCU Stand-alone..................................................................................................................3-18
Post Production System - Audio...........................................................................................3-19
Part III - Installation Quick Checkout Procedure...............................................................3-20
Chapter 4 Getting Started
Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 4-1
Key Functions........................................................................................................................ 4-1
Initialization and Configuration ........................................................................................... 4-1
Sign On .................................................................................................................................. 4-4
Operation Checks .................................................................................................................. 4-5
Setup Options .......................................................................................................................4-14
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
vii
Table of Contents
Chapter 4 Getting Started (continued)
Initial Synchronization ........................................................................................................4-15
Synchronizing Two Transports............................................................................................4-17
Synchronization with an OFFSET ......................................................................................4-21
Manually Set or Trim a Sync Point .....................................................................................4-26
Synchronizing Lynx-2s with a KCU Controller ..................................................................4-27
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
Error Messages ......................................................................................................................5-1
System Error Messages .........................................................................................................5-1
Warnings ................................................................................................................................5-4
Messages.................................................................................................................................5-6
Chapter 6 Features and Controls
Introduction............................................................................................................................6-1
Front Panel Controls and Indicators.....................................................................................6-4
Master Reference Controls and Indicators............................................................................6-6
Time Code Generator: Controls and Indicators ...................................................................6-8
Display Controls and Indicators ..........................................................................................6-24
Transport Controls and Indicators ......................................................................................6-32
Miscellaneous LEDs.............................................................................................................6-35
Bulkhead Features...............................................................................................................6-36
Rear Panel ............................................................................................................................6-37
Chapter 7 Time Code Generator
Introduction............................................................................................................................7-1
Setting the Generator Reference ...........................................................................................7-4
Selecting the Generator Code Type .......................................................................................7-4
Generator Modes ....................................................................................................................7-6
Pilot ......................................................................................................................................7-11
Chapter 8 Time Code Reader
Introduction............................................................................................................................8-1
Longitudinal Time Code Reader............................................................................................8-2
Serial Time Code Reader .......................................................................................................8-8
Introduction............................................................................................................................8-8
Reader Features .....................................................................................................................8-8
Difficulties Reading Longitudinal Time Code: Level, Tape Speed
and Frequency Response..............................................................................................8-9
Non-contiguous Time Code and Error Checking.................................................................8-12
Chapter 9 Sync & Resolver
Introduction............................................................................................................................9-1
Synchronizer Features ...........................................................................................................9-3
Time Code Word.....................................................................................................................9-4
Reference Source ....................................................................................................................9-6
viii
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Table of Contents
Chapter 9 Sync & Resolver (continued)
Time Code Frames ................................................................................................................ 9-9
Gearbox Processor ................................................................................................................. 9-9
Transport Communications .................................................................................................9-10
Frame and Phase Locking Modes ........................................................................................9-11
Sync Principals .....................................................................................................................9-12
Code Only Master.................................................................................................................9-13
Synchronization Setup Procedure........................................................................................9-14
Lynx-2 as a Resolver ............................................................................................................9-15
How Does a Resolver Operate? ............................................................................................9-16
Chapter 10 Gearbox Processor
Introduction ..........................................................................................................................10-1
Features................................................................................................................................10-1
Software................................................................................................................................10-2
Operation ..............................................................................................................................10-3
Restrictions.........................................................................................................................10-16
Introduction ........................................................................................................................10-17
Installing the Option Card.................................................................................................10-17
Theory of Operation ...........................................................................................................10-20
Functional Overview ..........................................................................................................10-20
Interface..............................................................................................................................10-22
Features and Controls........................................................................................................10-24
Interface Connections.........................................................................................................10-31
Initializing the Lynx-2 Film Module..................................................................................10-34
Operating the Lynx-2 Film Module ...................................................................................10-36
Appendix
List of Figures
Figure 1-1. Lynx-2 Front and Back Panels ......................................................................... 1-1
Figure 1-2. Bulkhead Features ............................................................................................ 1-5
Figure 1-3. System Overview............................................................................................... 1-6
Figure 2-1. Resolving a Single Machine .............................................................................. 2-2
Figure 2-2. Resolve and Lock ............................................................................................... 2-3
Figure 2-3. Chase Synchronization - Audio as Master........................................................ 2-4
Figure 2-4. Chase Synchronization - Video ......................................................................... 2-5
Figure 2-5. Post Production - Audio..................................................................................... 2-6
Figure 2-6. Adding an ATR to a Video Editor ..................................................................... 2-8
Figure 2-7. Lynx System Supervisor ................................................................................... 2-9
Figure 2-8. Lynx Keyboard Control Unit............................................................................2-10
Figure 2-9. Lynx Console Control Unit...............................................................................2-11
Figure 2-10. Remote Motion Controller..............................................................................2-12
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
ix
Table of Contents
Figure 2-11. Jog/Shuttle Wheel ..........................................................................................2-13
Figure 3-1. Rack Mounting Two Side-by-Side Units ...........................................................3-3
Figure 3-2. Rack Mounting A Single Lynx-2........................................................................3-5
Figure 3-3. Bulkhead Features.............................................................................................3-7
Figure 3-4. Basic Interface....................................................................................................3-8
Figure 3-5. Daisy Chaining Video Reference Source ...........................................................3-9
Figure 3-6. Reader Input Connection .................................................................................3-10
Figure 3-8. Transport Connection ......................................................................................3-12
Figure 3-9. Back Panel Auxiliary Connection ....................................................................3-14
Figure 3-10. Resolving a Single Machine ...........................................................................3-15
Figure 3-11. Adding an ATR to a Video Editor ..................................................................3-15
Figure 3-12. Chase Synchronizer - Audio...........................................................................3-16
Figure 3-13. Chase Synchronizer - Video ...........................................................................3-16
Figure 3-14. Biphase Slave Under External Control .........................................................3-17
Figure 3-15. Biphase Master Under External Control ......................................................3-17
Figure 3-16. KCU Stand-alone Production System ...........................................................3-18
Figure 3-17. Post Production System - Audio ....................................................................3-19
Figure 4-1. Front Panel Initialization Keys .........................................................................4-2
Figure 4-2. Front Panel Time Code Selection Keys .............................................................4-6
Figure 4-3. Front Panel Time Code Reader Display Key and LED's ..................................4-7
Figure 4-4. Front Panel TACH Display LED .......................................................................4-9
Figure 4-5. Front Panel Set Display...................................................................................4-10
Figure 4-6. Front Panel TACH and Time Code Display ....................................................4-11
Figure 4-7. Front Panel Transport Control ........................................................................4-13
Figure 4-8. Front Panel Setup Keys ...................................................................................4-14
Figure 4-9. Front Panel Synchronization Setup Keys .......................................................4-15
Figure 4-10. Front Panel Master Select .............................................................................4-18
Figure 4-11. Front Panel Offset Set and Store Keys .........................................................4-22
Figure 4-12. Front Panel Sync Point/Set Hold Keys..........................................................4-24
Figure 4-13. Front Panel Offset Set and Trim Keys ..........................................................4-25
Figure 4-14. Front Panel Sync Point Trim and Set Keys ..................................................4-26
Figure 4-15. Front Panel Sync Point Key...........................................................................4-26
Figure 4-16. Synchronizing Lynx-2s with a KCU Controller ............................................4-27
Figure 4-17. Front Panel Setup for KCU Operation..........................................................4-28
Figure 6-1.
Figure 6-2.
Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-4.
Figure 6-5.
Figure 6-6.
Figure 6-7.
Figure 6-8.
x
Lynx-2 Front Panel ............................................................................................6-4
Master Reference Controls and Indicators........................................................6-6
Generator Controls and Indicators....................................................................6-8
Code Type Control............................................................................................6-10
Generator Modes ..............................................................................................6-12
Reference Source Controls and Indicators ......................................................6-20
Display Controls and Indicators ......................................................................6-24
Display Control and Indicator LEDs ...............................................................6-25
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Table of Contents
Figure 6-9. Display Control Keys........................................................................................6-27
Figure 6-10. Record In/Out Timing.....................................................................................6-31
Figure 6-11. Transport Controls and Indicators ................................................................6-32
Figure 6-12. Bulkhead Features .........................................................................................6-36
Figure 6-13. Rear Panel ......................................................................................................6-37
Figure 7-1. Lynx-2 as a Generator....................................................................................... 7-1
Figure 7-2. Jam Sync Time Code ......................................................................................... 7-7
Figure 8-1.
Figure 8-2.
Figure 8-3.
Figure 8-4.
Figure 8-5.
Time Code Reader: Controls and Indicators.................................................... 8-1
Reader Source and Code-Type Indicators......................................................... 8-3
Set/Hold Reader Display ................................................................................... 8-6
Reshaped Code .................................................................................................. 8-7
Time Code Word ................................................................................................ 8-9
Figure 9-1.
Figure 9-2.
Figure 9-3.
Figure 9-4.
Figure 9-5.
Figure 9-6.
Figure 9-7.
Figure 9-8.
Lynx-2 as Synchronizer..................................................................................... 9-1
Time Code Data Stream.................................................................................... 9-2
Time Code Word ................................................................................................ 9-4
Sync Word.......................................................................................................... 9-5
Capstan Phase Detect & Servo. ........................................................................ 9-6
Reference Source Selection ............................................................................... 9-7
Transport Communications .............................................................................9-10
Lynx-2 as Resolver ...........................................................................................9-15
Figure 10-1.
Figure 10-2.
Figure 10-3.
Figure 10-4.
Figure 10-5.
Figure 10-6.
Figure 10-7.
Figure 10-8.
X-Frame Timing .............................................................................................10-3
Offsets in X-Frame .........................................................................................10-4
Varispeed Synchronization ............................................................................10-6
Offsets in Varispeed .......................................................................................10-7
Removing the Top Cover ..............................................................................10-18
Standoff Locations ........................................................................................10-19
Jumper Location...........................................................................................10-19
Jumper Locations .........................................................................................10-23
List of Tables
Table 3-1.
Table 3-2.
Table 3-3.
Table 3-4.
Table 3-5.
Reader Time Code Connector Pin Description................................................... 3-9
Generator Output Connector Pin Description ..................................................3-10
RS422 Connector Pin-outs .................................................................................3-11
Rear Panel, 50-Pin Transport Cable Connector................................................3-12
Rear Panel 15-Pin Auxiliary Connector ............................................................3-14
Table 4-1.
Table 4-2.
Table 4-3.
Table 4-4.
Time Code Check Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 4-8
Tach Pulse Troubleshooting...............................................................................4-11
Tach Pulse to Time Code Check Troubleshooting.............................................4-12
Initial Synchronization Troubleshooting...........................................................4-17
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
xi
Table of Contents
Table 4-5. KCU Troubleshooting With an External Controller.........................................4-31
Table 6-1.
Table 6-2.
Table 6-3.
Table 6-4.
Table 6-5.
Table 6-6.
ADDR Setup Menu ..............................................................................................6-9
OPT Setup Menu ...............................................................................................6-13
AUX-1 Setup Menu............................................................................................6-21
TRAN Setup Menu.............................................................................................6-25
Timing Setup Menu ...........................................................................................6-30
LED Status.........................................................................................................6-33
Table 8-1. LED Configurations .............................................................................................8-9
Table 10-1.
Table 10-2.
Table 10-3.
Table 10-4.
Table 10-5.
Table 10-6.
Table 10-7.
Table 10-8.
Table 10-9.
xii
X-Frame Rates .................................................................................................10-4
Offset Calculation, Key Combinations ............................................................10-9
Stand-alone X-Frame Combinations ...............................................................10-9
KCU X-Frame Combinations.........................................................................10-11
NTSC Varispeed Corrections.........................................................................10-12
Biphase Rates in Lynx-2 Film Module..........................................................10-24
AUX-1 Setup Menu ........................................................................................10-28
Rear Panel, 50-Pin Transport Cable Connector, For Film Module ..............10-31
Default Parameters .......................................................................................10-36
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Chapter 1 Introduction
Figure Chapter 1 -1. Lynx-2 Front and Back Panels
What is the Lynx-2 Time Code Module?
The Lynx-2 Time Code Module is a high performance, time code
synchronization interface for audio, video and film transports.
Representing the culmination of seven years of machine control experience, the Lynx-2 is specifically designed to handle the ever increasing machine control and synchronization applications required
of professional production, post production and broadcast users.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
1-1
Introduction
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
A wideband, high speed, 1/10 to 60x play speed, bi-directional
time code reader, and a multistandard time code generator.
Each module can be designated as master or slave.
Internal software parameter selections for over 125 different
transport types, a Macintosh computer port, GPI and mute
relays, and system status outputs.
Setup menus provide convenient user access to configure the
system for specific applications.
One or more Lynx-2 modules can be used to form a system, and
they can be used with or without an external controller.
The front panel keys and indicators provide complete user
access of all setup, functional and operational features.
A multifeatured synchronization interface, providing control
over a wide variety of audio and video machines.
Option Cards
An Optional Film card is available.
Each Lynx-2 Time Code Module contains four independent
functional units.
• Time code generator
• Time code reader (wideband)
• Transport synchronizer/resolver
• Asynchronous Communications (RS422 serial port)
Note
Throughout this manual you'll find references to other sections,
which will provide detailed information regarding a particular function,
feature or application.
1-2
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Introduction
Time Code Generator
The time code generator provides convenient, local time code
striping for each controlled transport. It can generate all worldwide standard time code types. Pilot rates (60, 59.94, 50, 48 Hz)
are generated. Jam sync, Jam tach and Jam user-bit modes are
also provided.
The time code generator can reference two standard, and three
non-standard timing reference sources. The standard references
are the module's internal crystal, and an external video sync
input. The external sync input accepts black burst, color bars or
composite video sync references. Time code generator details are
covered in the Getting Started chapter.
MIDI Time Code
Lynx-2 will generate MIDI Time Code (MTC) on the Macintosh
computer interface, allowing synchronization of MIDI systems to
audio/video transports, external controllers and DAWs.
In addition, Lynx-2 can convert all worldwide time code standards
to MTC. The MTC output is provided through the Macintosh,
DIN-8 connector on the rear panel. More MIDI information is
provided in the Applications and Advanced Features chapters.
Time Code Reader (Wideband)
The time code reader reads all SMPTE and EBU time code
formats as well as 24-frame “film” code. The bi-directional,
wideband reader automatically detects the time code type and
displays the code-type on the front panel.
The time code reader accepts input levels from -15 dBm to +4 dBm.
Play speeds from 1/10 to greater than 60x are supported. Reshaped
time code output can also be derived from the reader. Time code
reader details are covered in the Getting Started chapter.
Time Code Reader (Serial)
Serial Time Code can be read and used for synchronization. Serial
time code is detected through the serial communication lines in the
50-pin transport connector, on the rear of the Lynx-2 Module when
a serial video transport is connected. Serial time code reader
details are covered in the Getting Started chapter.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
1-3
Introduction
Transport Synchronizer/Resolver
The internal software supports over 125 user-selected audio/video
transports. A complete list is located in the Appendix.
The synchronizer provides rapid locate and sync-lock time, and
supports parallel, serial and combined machine interfaces. “Code
only master,” as a master reference source, is also supported.
The Lynx-2 is fitted with a gearbox processor. The gearbox
processor permits the synchronizer to lock machines with
dissimilar time codes. The gearbox also allows variable speed
synchronization when used with a TimeLine Keyboard Control
Unit (KCU).
An optional, plug-in FILM board permits the Lynx-2 synchronizer
to control and lock biphase-driven devices such as film transports.
In a Lynx-2 system, each transport is controlled and locked to a
system reference. This means that any module can be designated
as master or slave, independent of machine cabling. This allows
you to freely choose which transport is master and which are
slaves. No internal adjustments are required.
If time code drops out or is lost, the synchronizer will automatically switch to Pilot Tone input (if available), for continued
synchronization.
The Lynx-2 module can also be used as a speed only resolver. The
speed of any tape with prerecorded pilot tone or time code can be
resolved to the system master reference. Details are covered in
the Sync & Resolver chapter.
Asynchronous Communications
The Lynx-2 module has an asynchronous communications port for
connecting to other Lynx-2 modules or a controller, such as the
TimeLine KCU. The communications port is RS422 running at
38.4 Kbaud, which permits modules to be located up to 1000 ft.
away. The Lynx-2 module has two 9-pin "D", subminiature
connectors to permit daisy chaining between controller and Lynx-2
modules.
1-4
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Introduction
Bulkhead Features
The removable Lynx-2 front panel provides access to a number of
Lynx-2 features.
• Module software prom
• Module serial number
• Generator code output level adjustment
• Reader reshaped time code output adjustment
• Pilot output level adjustment
• Chassis ground isolate jumper
• System test points
• System operation confidence LEDs
Figure Chapter 1 -2. Bulkhead Features
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
1-5
Introduction
System Overview
Figure Chapter 1 -3. System Overview
Each transport is assigned a Lynx-2 Time Code Module. They are
generally daisy chained together through a standard, 9-pin RS422
cable, to form a system. The number of modules that may be
connected is practically unlimited. Lynx and Lynx-2 modules can
be mixed to form a system.
Lynx-2 modules may operate in one of two modes: as stand-alone
units in a system, or as slaves in an externally controlled system.
A stand-alone system is typically defined as a group of two or more
transports, each having their own designated Lynx-2 module.
(A single time code module/transport package may also be considered as a stand-alone system.) Any one of these transports can be
designated as master, all others become slaves in the system.
Master status can be assigned to any module, at any time.
An externally controlled system has one or more transport(s), each
with their own time code module, and an external
1-6
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Introduction
editor/controller. In an externally controlled system, the
controller is used to designate the master and slave transports.
The master Lynx-2, resolves to the selected timing reference
source. Slaves lock their position to the master, and their speed,
to the reference source.
Note
Throughout the text of this manual we will often refer generically
to the word transport(s). Unless otherwise specified, we are referring
to all audio, video, DAT, DAW, MIDI and/or other virtual machine
like devices.
System Configuration
Machine types and related operating parameters are stored in a
lookup table in the Lynx-2. Simply select a transport by name
from the list of over 125 transports, in the MENU software. The
software allows Lynx-2 to be easily reconfigured at any time, to
accommodate different transports.
Currently, Lynx-2 supports transports manufactured by:
AEG, Akai, Alesis, Ampex, Denon, Fostex, JVC, 3M, Mitsubishi,
Otari, Panasonic, Saturn, Sony, Stellavox, Studer, and Tascam.
When a transport type is selected from the menu, Lynx-2 automatically configures the correct:
• Logic input levels
• Logic input polarities
• Tach rates
• Analog outputs
• Frequency outputs
• Location toggle rates
• Ballistics information
• Record command timing
• Track selection logic
• Serial control protocol.
The first time a Lynx-2 module is powered up, an initialization
procedure must be completed. Once initialized, the module
defaults to the transport selection menu, ready for you to scroll
through and select the manufacturer and model of machine you
will be using.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
1-7
Introduction
Once the initialization process is complete, all necessary machine
control parameters are automatically stored into non-volatile
RAM. Subsequently, unless intentionally modified, the Lynx-2
will always recall this preset information upon power-up.
Once set, the module displays the following information on
power-up:
• Software version number
• Machine type selected
• Editor or controller type
• Module address
• Video standard (if present)
No other set-up operations are necessary. Getting Started, covers
all initialization instructions.
If you are experienced in using time code machine-control products, you may find the Features & Controls section helpful in
giving you a summary of the Lynx-2.
If time code machine control is new to you, you may want to read
the Appendix, before continuing.
1-8
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Introduction
Specifications
Time Code Generator
Operating Code
Output
Signal Output Level
Output Impedance
Signal Rise Time
Time Code Stability
Reference Sources
Internal Crystal
Internal Timing
External Video
Sources
Input Level
Input Impedance
Modes
SMPTE (30 FPS NDF)
SMPTE Drop Frame (30 FPS DF)
EBU (25 FPS)
Film Code (24 FPS)
Electronically balanced
0-5 Vpp adjustable
560 ohms
4 microseconds
±2 microseconds max.
30, 29.97, 25, 24 Hz
Crystal (±50 ppm)
30, 29.97 (NTSC Sync), 25 (PAL Sync)
Color bars, Black burst or Composite sync
0.5-8 Vpp
2 Kohms
Normal, Momentary JAM, Continuous
JAM, Tach-to-time code, JAM User Bits
Pilot Output
Output
Pilot Rate
Signal Output
Output Impedance
Reference
Electronically balanced
48-60 Hz Sinusoidal signal
0-2 Vpp adjustable
560 Ohms
Selectable, generator or reader
Input
Input Sensitivity
Input Impedance
Speed Range
Differential Input
-20 to +10 dBm
>10 Kohms
1/20-80 x play speed
Output
Signal Output
Output Impedance
Electronically balanced
0-5 Vpp adjustable
560 Ohms
Input
Input Sensitivity
Input Impedance
Frequency Range
Differential Input
200 mV to 5 Vpp
>10 KHz
48-60 Hz ±15%
Time Code Reader
Reshape Output
Pilot Input
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
1-9
Introduction
AUX Reference Input
Input
Input Impedance
Frequency Range
TTL
100 K
48-60 Hz ±15%
Lock Stability
Lock Time
Tach Frequency Range
User adjustment required
Parallel Interfaces
±50 microseconds, typical
2 to 3 seconds, nominal
1-10 KHz nominal play speed
None
Use TimeLine parallel cables (listed in
the Appendix) Auto-configures from
transport menu.
RS422: 38.4 Kbaud and
RS232: 9600 baud. Auto configures
from transport menu.
Synchronizer
Serial Interfaces
Front Panel
The removable front panel has the following characteristics:
Display
Alpha Numeric 16-character Dot Matrix
Selection keys
14 switches
LED status indicators
46 LEDs
Electrical
Mains Input
Power Requirement
90-265 VAC at 50-60 Hz
Approximately 10 W
Interconnections
The connectors mounted on the rear of the Lynx-2 are specified as
follows:
EXT VID
BNC Female Connector (2)
(internally looped to each other)
TC IN
1/4" Female stereo jack
RESHAPE
1/4" Female stereo jack
GEN OUT
1/4" Female stereo jack
PILOT IN
1/4" Female stereo jack
PILOT OUT
1/4" Female stereo jack
TRANSPORT
50-pin Female 'D' Connector
RS422
9-pin Female 'D' Connector (2)
(internally looped to each other)
AUX
15-pin Female 'D' Connector
MAC
8-pin Mini Circular
1-10
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Introduction
Transports
Supports transports manufactured by:
AEG, Akai, Alesis, Ampex, Denon, Fostex, JVC, 3M,
Mitsubishi, Otari, Panasonic, Saturn, Sony, Stellavox, Studer
and Tascam.
Option Cards
Film Biphase reader/generator
Mechanical
Dimensions
Weight
Shipping Dimensions
Shipping Weight
8.5"W x 1.75"H x 12"D
4 lbs, 0 oz
14"W x 4"H x 16"D
11 lbs, 0 oz
TimeLine Vista, Inc. reserves the right to change the design and specification of equipment without notice.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
1-11
Introduction
1-12
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Chapter 2 Applications
Introduction
Many different types of audio and video equipment are available.
Before installing your Lynx-2, think about how your system will
be set up and what functions you require. A helpful exercise is to
sketch out your proposed system, on paper, including all audio and
data cabling, so that you can develop a more defined plan of the
hardware and interface materials you'll need to augment your
existing system.
An efficient, high-performance system depends upon the quality
and compatibility of the equipment being used. We have selected
some of the more common configurations, used in the industry, to
help you visualize how some systems can be configured. Please
use Figures 2-3 through 2-6 as a guide for your specific
application.
Any given Lynx-2 may be designated as Master, but even if it is
the master time code module, it still has to have a speed reference.
The Lynx-2 can reference itself, using its internal crystal, or it can
be connected to some other external reference source, such as
"house" sync.
The Lynx-2 Time Code Module incorporates all of the processing
power and functions found in the previous Lynx and Lynx Film
modules. In addition to supporting all worldwide SMPTE/EBU
time code standards, the Lynx-2 has, fit as standard, a gearbox
processor and an industry standard, serial machine control port.
A plug-in option card, the Film Processor is available for the
Lynx-2 module.
Film Processor
The Lynx-2 is ready for the film processor option card.
Configuring a Lynx-2 to be a Biphase Slave, under external
control, is frequently used when adding tape machines to a film
chain. The Lynx-2 module is fed from the biphase source.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
2-1
Applications
This method of synchronization is more effective than putting a
time code-only reel of film on a film transport and feeding the time
code to a Lynx system in a "Code-only Master" mode.
The Lynx-2 can also be used as the Biphase Master. In this mode,
the Lynx-2 generates the biphase signal instead of slaving to it.
The advantage of this setup is that in "play" it will properly
resolve the film speed and position, relative to a video reference.
Resolving a Single Machine
Figure Chapter 2 -1. Resolving a Single Machine
Typical Uses
This application is for systems that require a transport to be
resolved to any speed reference other than its own internal speed
reference. Example: Resolved analog audio transports would not
use internally set capstan speeds such as 15/30 ips. Instead, the
transport would run at the reference source selected on the Lynx-2
module.
Analog tape transports derive their capstan speed reference from
a stable, internal frequency source. Since all machines have
slightly different internal frequencies, they will play at
fractionally different speeds. By resolving a machine, an exact
capstan/tape speed can be established.
The Lynx-2 module will resolve the speed of a machine to either
external video, mains or pilot tone. When Lynx-2 resolves the
playback speed of an analog tape transport, it ignores the position
or address of the time code. Instead, it locks the machine to the
selected reference source by reading the time code on pilot tone or
tape, and controlling the speed of the tape so that the "code" speed
2-2
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Applications
from the tape matches the reference speed. (Resolver details are
covered in the Sync & Resolver Section.)
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
2-3
Applications
Resolve and Lock
Figure Chapter 2 -2. Resolve and Lock
Typical Uses
The Resolve and Lock application is frequently used with Pilot.
Pilot, Pilot Tone or phase-locked synchronization (all
synonymous), is one of the original methods used to facilitate
synchronous operation. It uses a resolver to maintain a constant
speed between two or more transports.
Pilot synchronization is most commonly used in film applications.
Pilot is generated from, and referenced to, a stable sine wave such
as the AC power line frequency, or better yet, a crystal locked Pilot
Tone Generator. (Not all AC power lines operate at a solid line
frequency.)
In this application, the Slave time code modules will reference to
the Master transport's pilot frequency. For example, the master
might be an original production master recorded in the field on a
Nagra. The resolver's output controls the Slave transport's
capstan speed by generating an error calculation and updating the
correction signal, until the machines are running at the same
speed.
Again, this is a speed only application. Location to an exact
Hours:Minutes:Seconds:Frames (HH:MM:SS:FF) address is not
possible. Because of the cyclic or repetitive nature of the sine
wave used for the sync signal, it is impossible to define a single
pulse in a stream of sine wave oscillations.
An exception to using the Lynx-2 in this application is when video
or digital machines are used. Control of these machines is normally released by the Lynx-2 module and the configuration will
not work. In these instances, the reference source must come from
the digital or video transports that you are using. This is done by
selecting the master reference (MAST REF) to VSO. (Resolver
details are covered in the Sync & Resolver Section.)
2-4
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Applications
Chase Synchronization - Audio as Master
Figure Chapter 2 -3. Chase Synchronization - Audio as Master
Typical Uses
Use this setup when you are using an analog audio transport as
Master and other analog audio machines as Slaves.
The transports may be locked to an internal or external reference,
or run in VSO mode. In stand-alone (SAL) operation any number
of Lynx-2s and transports can be online, simultaneously.
Remember, one time code module must be assigned to each
transport. In this application, precise positional and speed
synchronization is achieved for multiple machines. Example:
Chase-locking together two or more multitrack machines for
increased tracking capabilities.
As with resolving a single transport, multiple machines are
resolved to the selected Lynx-2 reference source. Each machine,
which can be either an internal or external source, then resolves
independently to the reference. Any machine related disturbances
that may have been recorded on the master tape are not passed on
to the slave.
When necessary, the master reference can be set to VSO by using
the machines internal Variable Speed Oscillator. This allows you
to vary the speed of the Master transport being used as frequency
reference. When the Lynx-2 is set to VSO, the system will follow
the master time code rate and force the Slave(s) to operate at the
same speed as the Master.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
2-5
Applications
Chase Synchronization - Video
Figure Chapter 2 -4. Chase Synchronization - Video
Typical Uses
For chase sync applications, any audio or video transport may be
designated as Master. The video transport may be the Slave as
long as the Lynx-2 system reference source is set to external video
and connected accordingly.
This setup will cause analog audio machines to run at the
reference video speed. If an audio transport is Master, its Lynx-2
must be resolved or locked to the speed of the house sync
reference.
If you do NOT have house sync and are using only one video
machine, you can use the video machine as the Master reference
by setting the reference source to VSO. The Slave(s) speed will
then match the playback speed of the video tape transport.
The Lynx-2 can also be used in situations where the time code on
a video tape is not referenced to its own picture (stranger things
happen). If you run into this problem, please refer to the
Advanced Features and Troubleshooting sections.
2-6
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Applications
Post Production - Audio
Figure Chapter 2 -5. Post Production - Audio
Typical Uses
Just like the raw video footage, all of the audio elements that go
into a video production must be assembled. This procedure is
generally known as audio post-production. There are several
different branches of audio post, since there are many different
types of sound sources that go into a typical production.
These include production audio such as: dialog and live
production sound effects. Often, incidental noises on the
film/video set and other uncontrollable aspects of the shoot, such
as false starts, flubbed lines, makes the production audio
unusable. This brings us to the four main areas of audio post.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
2-7
Applications
ADR
Automated Dialog Replacement (ADR) is a process whereby actors
re-record production dialog in a sound studio. This replacement
dialog is recorded onto audio tape that has been striped with time
code and is locked to a video work print. The actors carefully
watch the work print as they re-read their lines.
Foley
Foley is the process whereby common "real life" sounds such as
footsteps, door closures, dish noises, and telephone rings, are
recorded by specialists called Foley walkers. They too make their
recordings while watching a work print that's synced to an audio
tape machine that records the sounds they make.
SFX
Sound effects (also referred to as SFX), are the spectacular sounds
such as explosions, crashes, gunshots, alien environments. Today,
most SFX work, as well as some Foley, is created using CD's,
digital audio samplers or DAWs (Digital Audio Workstations).
Samplers and DAWs are devices that can be synchronized, using
time code or MIDI Time Code (MTC).
Music
Music is generally supplied by an arranger/composer who works
with rough cuts (preliminary edits) of the finished show, and
ultimately the finished film/video master. The composer may
record real instruments onto audio tape, which is locked to picture
using time code and Lynx-2 modules, or work with virtual MIDI
tracks synced to the picture via MTC.
Often, there are many different audio tape sub-masters, each with
their associated transports and time codes. The post-production
audio may all reside on audio tape, or some or all of it may be
transferred to film dubber transports.
Ultimately, the multiple audio sources are blended together in the
final mixdown, resulting in a finished audio master. Because this
can be quite an elaborate process, many modern post-production
facilities use automated mixing consoles.
All video, audio and film transports and the console automation
can be controlled by TimeLine modules and interfaces. As you can
see, this process is only possible if accurate use of SMPTE/EBU
time code and synchronization methods are employed.
2-8
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Applications
Adding an ATR to a Video Editor
Figure Chapter 2 -6. Adding an ATR to a Video Editor
Typical Uses
The Lynx-2 can be used with video and audio editing control
systems that have Ampex VPR-3 communications capability.
This allows audio, video and film transports requiring parallel
or biphase control, to be added to a video editor.
Applications include: Sound effects (prelay), complex audio
operations to picture, simple video editing, audio transfer and
auto conforming.
To use a Lynx-2 in this setup, the module must be correctly
configured for your editor or controller. Many editors are
supported by the Lynx-2 module.
Please note that there are some specific limitations associated
with using an external controller or editor. They are:
1. The Lynx-2 and the editor must be compatible;
2. Pin #5 of the video editor cable must NOT be connected or
grounded;
3. Jog wheel performance is limited by the type of ATR. An
ATR with voltage controlled search will jog more smoothly
than those without;
4. Seamless insert editing capability is specific to each audio
tape machine;
5. The minimum edit length is governed by the ATR (typically
five frames);
6. If you wish to use an editor that is not supported, do not
assume that it will work, even if it is VPR-3 compatible.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
2-9
Applications
Lynx System Supervisor
Figure Chapter 2 -7. Lynx System Supervisor
Typical Uses
When used with Lynx-2 Time Code Modules, the Lynx System
Supervisor Unit (SSU) provides console automation and audio
post-production, system integration. The SSU helps bring an
integrated system online, with limited amount of time and
expense. All high-speed data communications for the entire
systems are handled with ease.
Lynx-2 is compatible with numerous transports and console
automation systems, providing accurate synchronization of
transports and mixing operations, from a single position within
the studio.
The Lynx SSU allows connection of multiple TimeLine control
units, as well as giving a direct software interface to many popular
studio computer systems.
2-10
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Applications
Keyboard Control Unit
Figure Chapter 2 -8. Lynx Keyboard Control Unit
Typical Uses
The Lynx Keyboard Control Unit (KCU), is a powerful machine
controller/editor. It can be used for a wide range of multiple
machine synchronization and audio editing applications.
As a stand-alone time code module, the Lynx-2 is unsurpassed in
its range of functions and applications. But, accessing these units
is a little like operating a multitrack tape deck, without a remote
control unit.
The TimeLine KCU provides a convenient, fast way to access
Lynx-2 functions.
Frequently performed operations and activities are placed at your
fingertips. Entering offsets, setting sync points and time code
numbers, setting record in/out points, selecting Master machine
and reference source, readying record tracks, and quickly
establishing and moving to new tape positions are all time
consuming activities, and a necessary part of production, postproduction and editing sessions.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
2-11
Applications
Without a KCU, the Lynx-2 modules and the master transport
remote can perform most of these activities. However, many more
keystrokes and some setup changes may be required. Complex,
multimachine systems can be complicated to operate. Generally,
anything that can streamline the process is welcome.
With the KCU, you can control up to six tape or film transports,
and two programmable GPI relay closures. Each transport may be
operated individually, or any combination of selected machines
may be placed into a synchronized group; with any of the
machines in that group designated as the Master.
Console Control Unit
Figure Chapter 2 -9. Lynx Console Control Unit
Typical Uses
The Lynx Console Control Unit (CCU), is a compact, consolemounted machine control panel, capable of executing a wide range
of multimachine synchronization and audio editing tasks. The
CCU is designed to provide the maximum amount of control
status, in a minimum amount of console top panel space. The
CCU is an accessory to the SSU, and is ideal for the less intensive
studio application.
The CCU provides a convenient, fast way to access Lynx-2
functions. Frequent operations and activities are placed at your
fingertips. With the CCU, up to six tape or film transports and
eight programmable GPI relay closures are under your control.
2-12
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Applications
Each transport may be individually accessed from the CCU, or a
selection of available machines may be operated as a synchronized
group; with any transport designated as the Master.
Entering offsets, setting record in/out and sync points, selecting
slew positions, selecting Master machines and reference source,
readying record tracks, and quickly establishing and moving to
new tape positions are all possible from the CCU.
Two CCUs or KCUs may be used simultaneously, in addition to
the automatic control system and standard parallel transport
control, in the more complex studio environment. A CCU and
KCU may also be used simultaneously.
Remote Motion Controller
Figure Chapter 2 -10. Remote Motion Controller
The Remote Motion Controller (RMC) provides the same motion
control switches as the KCU. The RMC may be added to the
System Supervisor to provide an additional remote transport controller, or to provide machine control and editing features for a
CCU/ SSU installation. When directly connected to the SSU, the
RMC provides LED indications for ADR beep countdown and
group lock. The RMC is available as a kit for mounting into a
console or other remote location.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
2-13
Applications
Jog/Shuttle Wheel
Figure Chapter 2 -11. Jog/Shuttle Wheel
A Jog/Shuttle Wheel assembly kit is available for customer installation into several System Supervisor applications. The
jog/shuttle kit is designed to connect directly to the CCU or the
SSU, SSL data interface option. The Jog/Shuttle Wheel assembly
provides console top mounting, for CCU applications, and allows
expansion of the Remote Motion Controller.
2-14
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Applications
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
2-15
Chapter 3 Installation
Introduction
This chapter describes installation and interface procedures for
the Lynx-2 Time Code Module. It also includes a quick software
check, to verify that the Lynx-2 is operational.
Part I of this chapter describes the different hardware and logistical elements that must be considered when installing a Lynx-2
Time Code Module. Part II provides interface illustrations for a
variety of applications. Part III is the module's Quick-Check software test procedure.
The procedures in Part I assume that you know the optimum system configuration for your facility, or that you have studied the
Applications chapter of the manual. The interface diagrams in
Part II of this chapter will also help you determine the appropriate
configuration.
Note
Please save the original factory packaging. It is specially designed to
protect your Lynx-2 module, should it require reshipment.
System Setup Planning
Before you install and configure your equipment, there are several
fundamental issues to consider.
AC Power
At least one AC outlet is required for each Lynx-2 module. If there
is more than one piece of equipment in the rack, use a surge-protected power distribution strip, fitted with an adequate extension
cable.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
3-1
Installation
Each Lynx-2 comes with a 3-wire, IEC power cable. The Lynx-2 is
fitted with an internally fused switching power supply, which operates with out adjustment over a wide range of conditions:
90-265 VAC, 50-60 Hz.
Power On Initialization
Before installing the Lynx-2 module, we recommend that the unit
is prepared for operation. The module is supplied from the
factory, ready for initialization.
When first powered up, the display flashes indicating that there is
no user setup, and the module is ready to store new parameters.
On power-up, the module initializes to the transport select menu.
Scroll through to select the manufacturer and model of the machine you will be using. Step through the list of machine
manufacturers using the keys marked {LAST} and {NEXT}. Once
you've found the correct manufacturer, press the [↑] or [↓] keys to
select the specific model.
When you find the correct machine, press the [STORE] key so that
the operational parameters of the transport are saved in the module's battery-backed RAM.
There are other parameters to set up and store in the unit's RAM.
However, they are not critical to the module's basic operation. For
the moment, press the [STORE] key as each setup selection option
is displayed, until the module switches out of the setup mode.
Chapter 4, Getting Started, covers other setup options in detail.
The Lynx-2 module only has to be initialized the first time power
is applied. All transport information is restored from RAM on
subsequent power-up.
Part I - Installation
The Lynx-2 Time Code Module may be mounted in an equipment
rack or used as a free-standing unit. The module is supplied with
the necessary hardware for rack mounting.
Free-standing
Sometimes the best location for the Lynx-2 module(s) is freestanding, rather than in a rack. If this is the case, you will not
need the rack ears, screws and nuts that come with each unit.
You may want to save them for future rack mount installation.
3-2
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Installation
Rack Mount Installation
Lynx-2 modules conform with industry standard dimensions, for
1/2-rack installation. Two modules are designed to fit side-by-side
in a standard 1U, 19" rack space.
Each module is supplied with a single rack mount "ear". To install
the rack mount "ears" to the Lynx-2 module, you will need a
Phillips screwdriver.
Warning
The components inside the Lynx-2 chassis are static-sensitive. BEFORE attaching
the rack mount hardware, be sure you and the Lynx-2 are properly grounded. This
will eliminate potential damage to the equipment. Place the unit on an anti-static
work area to ensure a trouble free installation.
Rack Mounting Two Side-by-Side Units
Figure Chapter 3 -1. Rack Mounting Two Side-by-Side Units
In the following instructions, when referring to the left and right
side of a module, the reference perspective is the front of the unit.
The most common installation configuration incorporates two
modules, mounted side-by-side. The following instructions are for
a two-module installation.
1. Place the two modules side-by-side on an antistatic work area.
2. There are three threaded nuts on the right side of the right
module. Use these nuts and three bolts to secure a rack ear to
the module.
3. Line up the three holes in the side leg of the rack extension,
with the three nuts on the right side of the chassis.
4. Put the bolts through the holes so that they thread into the
nuts and tighten.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
3-3
Installation
5. Check that all bolts are secure.
6. Next look at the right side of the left module. There are two
threaded nuts near the front of the module. These two nuts
line up with two holes on the left side of the right module.
7. Remove the two thumb screws securing the right front panel,
and slide the panel out.
8. Slide the modules together so that the holes in the right
module align with the nut positions in the left module.
9. Use two bolts to join the front of the two modules. Put the
bolts through the holes so that they thread into the nuts and
tighten.
10. Check that both bolts are secure.
11. Reinstall the front panel and tighten the thumb screws.
12. Next, locate and install the back-joining plate. This small
plate has four holes. These holes line up with the four bolts
that secure the rear panels to the chassis. The plate bridges
the space between the two units.
13. Remove the center four bolts holding the two back panels in
place.
14. Place the joining plate between the modules and reinstall the
four bolts.
15. Check that the bolts are all secure.
16. On the left side of the left module, there are two holes and a
threaded nut. Use these holes and the nuts and bolts supplied,
to attach the left-side rack ear.
17. Line up the three holes in the left-side rack ear with the holes
in the left side of the chassis. Put one screw through the rear
mounting hole to secure the ear in place.
18. Remove the two thumb screws securing the left front panel and
slide the panel out. Place the remaining two screws through
the front rack ear holes and secure using the supplied nuts,
and tighten.
19. Check that all bolts are secure.
20. Reinstall the front panel and tighten the thumb screws.
The two Lynx-2 modules are now ready to install in your
equipment rack.
1. Slide the modules into position in the equipment rack.
2. Secure by inserting two, #8-32 rack screws through each ear
and into the threaded rack rail, then tightening.
3. Attach a power cable to each Lynx-2.
3-4
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Installation
Rack Mounting a Single Unit
When installing only one Lynx-2 module, it must be mounted on
the left side of the equipment rack. An optional single unit rack
mount kit is required to install a single module.
When referring to the left and right sides of a module, the
reference perspective is the front of the unit.
1. There are two holes and a threaded nut on the left side of the
module. Use these holes and the supplied nuts and bolts to
attach the standard rack mount ear.
2. Line up the three holes in the left-side rack ear with the holes
in the left side of the chassis. Put one screw through the rear
mounting hole to secure the ear in place.
3. Remove the two thumb screws securing the front panel and
slide the panel out. Place the remaining two screws through
the front rack ear holes and secure using the supplied nuts.
Tighten firmly
4. Reinstall the front panel and tighten the thumb screws.
Figure Chapter 3 -2. Rack Mounting A Single Lynx-2
When a single module is rack mounted, the right-side rack ear is a
half-rack blank panel.
1. There are three threaded nuts on the right side of the module.
Use these nuts and three bolts to secure the rack extension kit
to the module.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
3-5
Installation
2. Line up the three holes in the side leg of the rack extension
with the three nuts on the right side of the chassis.
3. Put the bolts through the holes so that they thread into the
nuts. Tighten firmly.
4. Place the gusset on the studs, on the rack bracket, and loosely
secure the gusset using two of the nuts supplies.
5. Place the blank front plate on the extension bracket with the
center studs through the gusset. Secure the plate in place
using the nuts supplied. Tighten firmly.
6. Tighten the nuts holding the gusset to the rack bracket firmly.
The single Lynx-2 module is now ready to install in your
equipment rack.
1. Slide the Lynx-2 into position in the equipment rack.
2. Secure by inserting 2 - #8-32 rack screws through each ear and
into the threaded rack rail, then tighten.
Cabling
Lynx-2 requires both machine specific and generic cabling.
Transport Cables
•
•
Use a custom transport cable to connect each Lynx-2 to its
local transport. Specific cables for all supported transports are
available from an authorized TimeLine dealer. (See the
Appendix, for a detailed list of transport cables.)
The 15-pin "D", sub-connector is an auxiliary serial option port,
which also provides mute relay and lock status outputs. The
cable is application dependent, and must be custom made.
Generic Cables
•
•
•
•
•
3-6
Use SMPTE standard, 9-pin RS422 cables (supplied with the
module) to connect all Lynx-2 modules, forming the system BUS.
Use 2-conductor shielded audio cable, with 1/4" TRS connectors
for TC IN, Reshape, GEN out, and Pilot in/out jack connections.
The inputs are all differential. The outputs are all balanced.
Termination of the opposite end of each cable will be determined by the connector, on the associated machine.
Use standard BNC cables to connect the Lynx-2 to external
video and VITC sources. The EXT VID BNC jacks are wired in
parallel and can be used to loop from one module to the next.
Use a standard 8-pin DIN, Macintosh computer cable for
access to the MAC interface port.
Lynx-2 uses a standard, 3-wire IEC power cord.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Installation
Bulkhead Features
The removable Lynx-2 front panel provides access to a number of
Lynx-2 features.
• Module software prom
• Module serial number
• Generator code output level adjustment
• Reader reshaped time code output adjustment
• Pilot output level adjustment
• Chassis ground isolate jumper
• System test points
• System operation confidence LEDs
Figure Chapter 3 -3. Bulkhead Features
The nominal setting for the output level adjustments is -8 VU.
The adjustment pots have a range of from zero to +10 dBm.
A chassis ground isolation jumper is provided. This jumper allows
the user to choose between having the signal and chassis grounds
connected or separated.
The video and communications grounds are always isolated.
Other jumpers and test points include:
• Optional interface card jumpers
• Software program jumpers
• Test points.
The Lynx-2 system software can be updated by change the PROM
(U50) immediately behind the front panel bulkhead cut out.
Please refer to PROM Installation Guide (Part Number 73625)
when installing new Lynx-2 software.
The Lynx-2 Serial Number is located on the bulkhead label. This
number is required for all communications with the factory.
Two system "OK" confidence LEDs are provided. Both of these
LED's should be on, in normal operation.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
3-7
Installation
Setup Exceptions
When Lynx-2 is to be used as a Generator or Reader ONLY, any
transport can be selected from the transport menu.
Basic Interface
Now that you have initialized the Lynx-2, you are ready to install
it into your system. Specific cable installation is application dependent. If needed, refer to Part II of this chapter for help in determining your cabling requirements.
Each transport must have a local Lynx-2 module. Together, they
comprise a synchronized unit. A synchronized unit consists of one
machine and one Lynx-2 module.
Basic interface requires a minimum of four connections for each
synchronized unit:
• Connect a video reference source
• Time Code Reader input from transport
• Connect RS422 communications cables
• Connect each transport with a 50-pin transport cable.
Figure Chapter 3 -4. Basic Interface
Video Reference Source
The video reference source should be either NTSC or PAL
blackburst, color bars, or composite sync, and should come from a
reliable reference sync generator or house sync generator. The
reference source should be properly terminated.
3-8
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Installation
Figure Chapter 3 -5. Daisy Chaining Video Reference Source
Connect the video reference source to the EXT VID BNC connectors on the back of the Lynx-2. There are two, parallel BNC input
jacks on each module. Connect all other modules requiring the
video reference by looping from one module to the next.
Terminate the last module with a 75Ω termination plug.
Reader Input
Connect a 1/4" TRS cable from the time code output of the
transport to the TC IN jack on the back of the Lynx-2 module.
This cable feeds Longitudinal Time Code from the machine, to the
Reader input of the module.
Table Chapter 3 -1. Reader Time Code Connector Pin Description
Pin
Tip
Ring
Sleeve
Description
Time Code Reader +
Time Code Reader Ground
The Lynx-2 module uses the time code to synchronize the
machine. This is typically a balanced connection. Wire the cable
so that the "hot" pin (typically pin #2) on the transport output goes
to the tip of the TRS plug.
Figure Chapter 3 -6. Reader Input Connection
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
3-9
Installation
Note:
The Lynx-2 module can also use serial time code to synchronize a serial
VTR. This type of installation does not require a separate LTC feed
from the machine. Time code is detected serially through the VTR
9-pin connector.
Generator Output
Optionally, connect a 1/4" TRS cable from the GEN OUT jack on
the back of the Lynx-2 module, to the time code input on the tape
transport. This cable is used to stripe tape with longitudinal time
code from the Lynx-2 time code generator.
Table Chapter 3 -2. Generator Output Connector Pin Description
Pin
Description
Tip
Time Code Reader +
Ring
Time Code Reader -
Sleeve
Ground
RS422 Communications
Figure Chapter 3 -7. Daisy-Chaining RS422 Communications
There are two, parallel RS422 I/O ports on each Lynx-2 module.
These ports provide a communications path between all Lynx-2
modules in a system.
Each Lynx-2 module comes with a standard RS422 cable. These
cables should be used to daisy chain all the additional modules
that your system may require.
3-10
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Installation
If it is necessary to mount the modules in separate locations, the
RS422 cable may be extended up to 1000 feet. Use high quality,
multipair cable that is made up of at least three individually
shielded, twisted pairs. Lynx-2 uses the standard RS422 connections and pin no. 5 of the 9-pin connector. (See Table 3-2.)
Table Chapter 3 -3. RS422 Connector Pin-outs
PIN
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
MSTR
GND
GND
RX RX +
TX +
TX GND
GND
FRM CLK
SLAVE
GND
GND
TX TX +
RX +
RX GND
GND
FRM CLK
Serial Addresses
When Lynx-2 is used with a TimeLine Keyboard Control Unit
(KCU) or with another controller, each module must have a
unique serial address so that communications between multiple
machines do not get confused.
Note:
To operate the KCU with the Lynx-2 module, the KCU processor board
must be modified. See the Appendix for Service Bulletin (SB91-003)
modification instructions. If your KCU operates with KCU080-14
software or higher, this modification has already been completed.
Press the [SHIFT] and [MSTR] keys simultaneously, then press
the [GEN CODE] key. This accesses the ADDRess options. Press
the [↑] key to advance the address of the module by one. The [↓]
key will decrease the address in the display by one.
Make sure that no two modules in the system have the same
address.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
3-11
Installation
Transport Connection
Figure Chapter 3 -8. Transport Connection
It is important that the appropriate 50-pin transport cable is used
to connect the Lynx-2 to its local transport. Please refer to the
Appendix for a list of Transport Cables that may be purchased
from an authorized TimeLine dealer. Table 3-3 indicates the pinout configuration of the transport cable.
When the Lynx-2 is used as a generator or reader only, or in
Code-Only Master operation, a transport cable is not required.
Table Chapter 3 -4. Rear Panel, 50-Pin Transport Cable Connector
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
3-12
Signal
Ground
Transport ground sense
Stop (still) command
Capstan frequency output
N/C
Lifter drop command
Fast forward/direction command
Record tally
Auxiliary in 2
Lock Light or Ch 4 insert command
Channel 1 insert command
Rehearse command
Servo relay-A N/C
Servo relay-B common
Servo relay-B N/O
RS422 (-)/RS232 TX (-)
N/C
+5V (50 mA max)
Record-off command collector (+)
Search command collector (+)
Adaptor Detect
AUX Out Opto
Transport command common
Rewind command
Play tally
Pin
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Signal
Tach direction sense
Channel 2 insert command
Video insert command or Ch 3
Servo relay-A N/O
Servo relay A common
Servo relay-B N/C
RS422 TX (+)
N/C
Ground
Record-off command emitter (-)
Search command emitter (-)
Play command
Search volts out
Capstan volts out
Record-on command
Auxiliary in 1
Tach pulse in
AUX Out O/C
-12V (50 mA max)
+12V (50 mA max)
Mute relay N/O
Mute relay N/C
Mute relay common
RS422 RCV (-)/RS232 RCV (-)
RS422 RCV (+)
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Installation
Note:
Some of these pins have different designations when the Lynx-2 is
fitted with a film option card. Please see separate table in Advanced
Features, for these designations.
Code-Only Master
When setting up the Lynx-2 as a Code Only Master, you may select any audio transport from the transport menu. The MSTR
REF SRC must be in VSO mode. (See Chapter 8, Synchronizer
and Resolver, for detailed information.)
A Code Only Master normally supplies valid time code, even at
wind speeds. Therefore, if time code is recorded on an audio track,
the HF limitations of the audio channel's playback amplifier may
need to be modified to accommodate the highest shuttle
speeds/frequencies expected.
Most ATRs do not have this facility and the Slave transports will
only chase the Master when valid code is present.
Modern VTRs that have a time code track, need no modification.
These VTRs are manufactured with special wideband amps that
can decode high speed signals.
A Transport cable is not required when operating in code-only
mode.
Pilot Input
Optionally, connect a 1/4" TRS cable from a pilot tone output on
the transport to the PILOT IN jack on the back of the Lynx-2
module. The Lynx-2 module can use the pilot tone input signal to
resolve the speed of a transport, or to maintain synchronization, if
time code is lost or not present.
Pilot Output
Optionally, connect a 1/4" TRS cable from the PILOT OUT jack on
the back of the Lynx-2 module to an audio input on the transport.
The Lynx-2 pilot output signal is a sinusoidal signal that can be
software selected to follow the time code reader input or generator
output.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
3-13
Installation
Auxiliary Connection
Figure Chapter 3 -9. Back Panel Auxiliary Connection
The 15-pin "D-type" Auxiliary connector on the rear panel of the
Lynx-2 is used to connect the TimeLine Lynx-2 remote front panel
mounting kit. To simplify installation when the module is being
used with different transparent cables, the connector also has
duplications of the transport connector module lock light, and
mute relay connections. This connector is also used to connect the
(50-60 Hz nominal) auxiliary input generator reference source
timing signal.
Table Chapter 3 -5. Rear Panel 15-Pin Auxiliary Connector
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3-14
Signal
+12 VDC
OPEX Rx D+
OPEX Tx D+
Mute Rly N/C
Ex Gnd
+12 VDC
OPEX Rx DOPEX Tx D-
Pin
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Signal
Ex Gnd
Ex Gnd
Mute Rly Com
Mute Rly N/O
Lock Light
Aux Freq In
+5 VDC
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Installation
Part II - Interface Diagrams
This section presents a variety of interface diagrams. Refer to the
diagram that most closely represents your system setup and application. Remember, slight differences in equipment may require
small configuration modifications.
Figure Chapter 3 -10. Resolving a Single Machine
Figure Chapter 3 -11. Adding an ATR to a Video Editor
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
3-15
Installation
Chase Synchronizer - Audio
Figure Chapter 3 -12. Chase Synchronizer - Audio
Chase Synchronizer - Video
Figure Chapter 3 -13. Chase Synchronizer - Video
3-16
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Installation
Biphase Slave Under External Control
Figure Chapter 3 -14. Biphase Slave Under External Control
Biphase Master Under External Control
Figure Chapter 3 -15. Biphase Master Under External Control
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
3-17
Installation
KCU Stand-alone
Figure Chapter 3 -16. KCU Stand-alone Production System
3-18
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Installation
Post Production System - Audio
Figure Chapter 3 -17. Post Production System - Audio
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
3-19
Installation
Part III - Installation Quick Checkout Procedure
The primary function of the Lynx-2 module is to synchronize slave
transports to a master. Before attempting to put a multimachine
system online, verify that basic functions of each synchronized
unit are working properly.
Transport Functions
The following steps will allow you to verify that the basic functions
are working:
1. Follow the initialization and setup procedures outlined in
Part I above. Be sure that the proper transport has been selected. The ability to synchronize a transport is absolutely
dependent upon selecting the correct transport at power up.
2. Check to see that the correct transport cable has been
connected between the transport and Lynx-2.
3. Check to see that a time code cable has been connected
between the transport and Lynx-2 Reader input.
4. Load a pre-striped time code tape on the transport so that it is
ready to play. If pre-striped tapes are not available, refer to
Chapter 7, Time Code Generator, for instructions on how to
generate and record time code.
5. If a machine has an "external capstan" switch, make sure it is
in the EXTERNAL position.
6. Press the [TRAN MODE] key to put the machine online.
You are now ready to verify basic transport functions.
7. You may now press each of the transport function keys on the
front of the module, to verify that the machine transport functions are responding properly.
PLAY = [SHIFT] + [CLR]
STOP = [SHIFT] + [↓]
FAST FORWARD = [SHIFT] + [SET HOLD]
REWIND = [SHIFT] + [SYNC POINT]
RECORD = [SHIFT] + [STORE]
REHEARSE = [SHIFT] + [↑]
3-20
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Installation
Reader Test
Next, verify that the Reader is working properly.
1. If you haven't already done so, check to see that a time code
cable has been connected between the output of the machine's
time code track and the Lynx-2 Reader input.
2. Press the [DSPL SEL] key and toggle through the LEDs until
RDR is selected. This puts the Reader register in the display.
3. Press Play on either the machine, or the Lynx-2. Allow the
transport to run for at least 10 seconds to verify that time code
is counting on the display, and that the green LTC LED is on.
Generator Test
Next, check that the Lynx-2 is generating and displaying time code.
1. If the transport is online, take it offline by pressing the [TRAN
MODE] key. The module is offline when the online LED is not
lit.
2. Press the [DSPL SEL] key and toggle through the LEDs until
GEN is selected. This puts the generator register in the
display.
3. Press the [GEN REF] key and toggle through the LEDs until
INT is selected. This selects the module's internal crystal as
the speed reference for the generator.
4. Press the [GEN CODE] key and select any code. Since this is a
test, the code and code type are not yet critical.
5. Now press the [GEN ON] key. The generator LED should
come on and time code addresses be displayed.
Providing all the basic tests have checked out OK, you are now
ready to move on to more specific operations. (See Chapter 4,
Getting Started.)
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
3-21
Installation
3-22
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Chapter 4 Getting Started
Introduction
Once the Lynx-2 system is installed, turn it on. Use the basic
operating procedures outlined in this chapter to demonstrate the
modules features and controls. This chapter will help you become
familiar with the operation and capabilities of the Lynx-2 Time
Code Module.
This chapter covers:
1. Configuration of the Lynx-2.
3. Basic operating checks to use when setting up your system.
4. Selection of an operating mode to show what Lynx-2 can do.
Key Functions
The Lynx-2 front panel switches are used in one of three
operational modes, directly, shifted and in setup. The shifted
functions are indicated above the switches and are accessed by
simultaneously pressing the blue shift key and the desired
function key. The setup functions are indicated below the
switches. Setup mode is accessed by simultaneously pressing the
blue shift key and the [MSTR] key. Setup mode is "latched" and
the setup menus and functions can be directly accessed. To exit
setup mode, press shift and [MSTR] again.
Initialization and Configuration
The Lynx-2 module's non-volatile memory is completely cleared
before leaving the factory and is ready for operational
configuration.
When first turned on, the module will initialize and then flash the
display to indicate that it is ready to store the configuration
parameters. The module defaults to the transport selection menu,
ready for you to scroll through and select the manufacturer and
model of machine you will be using.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
4-1
Getting Started
We recommend that the non-volatile RAM be cleared each time
the module is connected to a new or different transport. To
completely clear the RAM, press and hold the [CLR] key while you
power-up.
The initialization process is as follows:
Figure Chapter 4 -1. Front Panel Initialization Keys
1. Power switch ON
TimeLine is displayed and all LEDs light.
A 2-second LED check is automatically performed.
Note any LED's that do not function.
Lynx-2 V700-XXX displayed
V700 is the Lynx-2 master software program. Version XXX
identifies the current revision that is installed in the
module.
AUTO Ser TRAN displayed
This is the default choice in the transport menu.
Because the unit has not been configured, it automatically
powers up in SETUP mode. The Auto Serial Transport
setting automatically detects the serial transport connected
and loads the appropriate setting. For a complete list of
VTR’s supported, see the Cable Reference Guide in the
Appendix. You may also step through the list of transport
manufacturers using the {LAST} and {NEXT} keys. Once
you've found the correct manufacturer, press the [↑] or [↓]
keys to select a specific model.
2. Press [STORE]
AUTO Ser TRAN (or any other transport on the menu) displayed
Once you find the correct machine, press the [STORE] key
so that the operational parameters of that specific transport
are saved in the module's non-volatile RAM. The display
stops flashing.
Note:
Each time you turn on the Lynx-2, the selected transport is displayed.
4-2
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Getting Started
3. Press [TRAN Mode] {Menu}
Editor KCU flashing in the display
This is the default controller type (TimeLine KCU). If you
are using a KCU with old software or a controller made by
another manufacturer, store this parameter. (A list of
editor types are in the Appendix.) If you are using the
Lynx-2 in a stand-alone system, this parameter can be
ignored.
Press [STORE]
Editor KCU displayed
Saves your selection, the display stops flashing.
4. Press [TRAN Mode] {Menu}
Address 1 displayed
This is the default address. If the module is being used in a
stand alone system, this parameter can be ignored. If you
are using a controller and have more than one Lynx-2 in
your system, each must have a unique serial address.
Press [↑] or [↓] to select different addresses.
5. Press [STORE]
Address 1 displayed
Saves your selection, and the display stops flashing.
6. Press [TRAN Mode] {Menu}
DONE displayed
Transport and address selection are complete.
7. Press [STORE]
To exit the Setup mode.
The Lynx-2 automatically stores your setup configuration in RAM,
then reinitializes. The selections you have made will be displayed
and the module will calibrate the capstan output and detect the
video reference type.
Once set, all necessary machine control parameters are
automatically stored into non-volatile RAM. The module displays
the following information on power-up:
• Software version number
• Machine type selected
• Editor or controller type
• Module address
• Video standard (if present).
The Lynx-2 will always recall this preset information on power-up,
or until intentionally modified. All stored parameters are
immediately operational.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
4-3
Getting Started
Sign On
Each time you turn on the Lynx-2, after its original configuration,
the system will sign on by sequentially showing the following
information on the front panel display.
If the displayed parameter is not correct, the setting can be
modified as needed, by entering Setup mode. The display shows
the following:
Display & LED Test. The numeric display will show the TimeLine
name and turn on all the Front panel LEDs to indicate full
functionality.
Software Version XXX. Lynx-2 V700-XXX is the current software
revision installed in the module.
Transport. "AUTO Ser TRAN," is the name of the machine that
has been selected as the local transport.
Editor Type. The editor type selected to control the system.
Editor type only needs to be set in a controlled system. This
setting does not affect operation in a stand-alone system (SAL).
Module Address. The address number of the module in a
controlled system. Each Lynx-2 module must have a different
address. When the Lynx-2 is operated as a stand-alone system
(SAL) then the address setting does not affect operation.
Calibrating. The Lynx-2 automatically calibrates the selected
transport's Capstan Control output for the three operating speeds.
Video Detect. The Lynx-2 measures the external video sync
source if present. If there is no video connected, press [CLR] to
bypass this test.
Video Type. The type of video reference detected is displayed.
00:00:00:00. The display is initialized to the time code reader and
the module is ready for operation.
4-4
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Getting Started
Operation Checks
Instead of an elaborate operator setup procedure for each
transport, the Lynx-2 software has been designed to recognize and
load the necessary operational parameters for each transport. The
Lynx-2 automatically sets and detects:
•
•
•
•
•
Tallies and transport commands
Lifter controls
Relative timing offsets between erase and record heads
Center frequency or voltage for the capstan control output
Tape speed
Time Code and Tach Pulse checks should be performed with each
synchronized unit before putting Lynx-2 into full operation.
Time Code Check
To perform the basic operational checks, do not connect the Lynx-2
to a Keyboard Control Unit (KCU), editor, controller, or another
Lynx-2.
Load a tape containing valid time code onto the transport. If
manual switching to external control is required, select external
capstan control on the transport.
Remember, the tape must be prestriped with time code. If not,
use the following procedure, or refer to Chapter 7 for instruction
on how to generate and stripe time code.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
4-5
Getting Started
Generate Time Code
The following procedure is used to select the code type and
generator reference rate for striping code on tape. Time code must
be striped with the tape transport running at fixed speed. Take
the Lynx-2 offline to ensure that the machine will run on internal.
Connect a time code cable between the Lynx-2 GENOUT Jack and
the machine's, time code track input.
Figure Chapter 4 -2. Front Panel Time Code Selection Keys
1. Press [TRAN MODE]
ONLINE LED off
Press the [TRAN MODE] key to take the module offline so
that the tape machine will run at fixed speed.
2. Press [DSPL SEL]
GEN LED on
Press [DSPL SEL] one or more times to select the
generator to the display.
3. Press [GEN REF]
INT or VID LED on
Press the [GEN REF] key to select Internal crystal or
External video, if connected, as the generator speed
reference.
4. Press [GEN CODE]
29.29 and 30 LED on (USA & Japan), 25 LED on (Europe)
Press the [GEN CODE] key one or more times to select the
code type to be generated. The 29.97 and 30 LEDs indicate
that non-drop frame code (30 frame) will be generated at
the NTSC rate of 29.97 frames-per-second.
5. Press [GEN ON]
Display updates
Press the [GEN ON] key to select the generator. See
Chapter 7, for presetting the generator to a different time
code start value.
6. Press PLAY + REC (Transport)
Puts the machine into record and strip time code.
4-6
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Getting Started
Verify Time Code
Ensure the time code cable is connected between the time code
track on the machine and the TC IN jack on the module. Use a
1/4" TRS cable.
Ensure the transport cable is connected between the machine and
the 50-pin transport connector on the Lynx-2.
Figure Chapter 4 -3. Front Panel Time Code Reader Display Key and LED's
1. Press [TRAN MODE]
Transport ONLINE LED off
The module should be offline. Press [TRAN Mode] if it is
online.
2. Press [DSPL SEL]
RDR LED on
Select the reader display for this test.
3. Press PLAY (transport)
Display incrementing and LTC LED on
Lynx-2 is now reading time code. Press the [DSPL SEL]
key one or more times until RDR is selected.
4. Press STOP (transport)
Display stops
Stop the transport. The Lynx-2 display will also stop.
Check that the transport code type LED column is displaying the
correct code type.
Check that the Lynx-2 machine speed indicator LEDs (H, M, L)
are showing the correct speed.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
4-7
Getting Started
Table Chapter 4 -1. Time Code Check Troubleshooting
Problem: Lynx-2 used for audio only; initialization stops at
the Video detect prompt.
Solution: Press [CLR]
Lynx-2 will wait at the EXT VID detect prompt until
either:
1. An external video cable reference source is detected.
2. [CLR] is pressed.
Problem: The LTC LED does not turn on when you put the
transport into play.
Solutions:
• Check the time code cable. The time code cable must
be correctly attached for Lynx-2 to read time code.
• Check that the tape is striped with the time code.
Listen to the time code output. The time code cable
must be connected to the TC IN jack on the Lynx-2 and
the time code output from the machine.
Problem: The LTC and TACH LEDs flash on and off.
Solutions:
• Check the time code cable. The time code cable must
be correctly attached for Lynx-2 to read time code.
• Check that the machine is set to run at the correct
speed. The TACH LED indicates that you are reading
tach pulses, not time code.
TACH and Direction Signals Check
Next, let's check the TACH (tachometer) pulse rate and duration
signals. This test checks the rate of time code against the rate of
TACH pulses.
Note
The time code and initialization procedures must have been successfully
performed.
4-8
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Getting Started
Make sure the connection between the transport's time code track
and the module's TC IN (Reader input) is disconnected for this
test. This forces the module to read the transport's TACH pulses.
Make the RDR display active. If it is not, press the [DSPL SEL]
one or more times to step the display to RDR.
Press PLAY on the machine and verify that when the transport is
moving, the TACH light is on and the display is counting correctly
in the forward direction.
TACH Pulse Check Procedure
Figure Chapter 4 -4. Front Panel TACH Display LED
1. Disconnect the 1/4" TRS cable between the transport and the
TC IN on the Lynx-2.
2. Press [TRAN MODE]
ONLINE LED off
Take the Lynx-2 offline if it is online.
3. Press PLAY (transport)
TACH LED on
Lynx-2 starts reading and displaying tach pulses in real
time. If TACH LED not on, see Table 4-2.
4. Press STOP (transport)
Display stops incrementing. Stop the transport.
5. Press REWIND (transport)
Lynx-2 display reading with the display counting down.
6. Press FAST FORWARD (transport)
Lynx-2 display reading with the display counting up.
7. Press STOP (transport)
Display stops.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
4-9
Getting Started
Set TACH Pulse Display to Match Transport Display
Figure Chapter 4 -5. Front Panel Set Display
1. Press [DSPL SEL]
RDR LED on
Press [DSPL SEL] one or more times to turn on the RDR
LED.
2. Press [SET HOLD]
Display flashes
The reader register starts to flash indicating that it may be
edited.
3. Press [CLR]
00:00:00:00 is displayed
Clears the reader register.
4. Press [STORE]
00:00:00:00 is displayed
Stores the value currently displayed in the reader register.
5. Press RESET (transport)
Set the transport tape timer to 00:00.
6. Press PLAY (transport)
Lynx-2 display reading
Play transports for about 60 seconds. Verify that the
"seconds" display is counting in real time. The transport's
display should be the same as the Lynx-2's.
7. Press STOP (transport)
Display stops incrementing
When the transport is stopped, the TACH pulses on the
Lynx-2 and transport stop.
8. Press RWD or FFD (transport)
Display reading
Spool the transport for two or three minutes, verify that the
transport display closely matches the Lynx-2 display.
4-10
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Getting Started
Table Chapter 4 -2. Tach Pulse Troubleshooting
Problem: Lynx-2 is not reading or displaying TACH pulses.
Solution: Check the transport cable and connections.
The transport cable must be securely connected for
Lynx-2 to read TACH pulses.
Problem: The Lynx-2 display is not incrementing
simultaneously with the transport TACH display.
Solutions:
• Check the transport cable and connections.
• Check that the correct transport has been selected in
the setup procedure. Some machines have selectable
tach rates.
• Check that the correct rate is selected.
TACH Pulse to Time Code Check
Figure Chapter 4 -6. Front Panel TACH and Time Code Display
This check tests the time code to tach pulse relationship
1. Press [TRAN MODE]
ONLINE LED off
To perform this test the module should be offline, press
[TRAN MODE] if it is online.
2. Connect the time code output from the machine to the Lynx-2
TC IN jack.
3. Press PLAY (transport)
> Display updates, LTC LED on, Code type LED on
Put the transport in play and let the time code reader read
time code. Check that the transport code type LED
indicates the correct code type.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
4-11
Getting Started
4. Remove the time code cable from the Lynx-2 reader input.
LTC LED off, TACH LED on
The Lynx-2 switches from LTC to TACH, to update the
reader position.
5. Press FWD (Transport)
Display updates
Fast forward the transport a few minutes so that the
Lynx-2 reader updates to a new value based on machine
tach output.
6. Press STOP (Transport)
Reconnect the time code reader input.
7. Press PLAY (Transport)
Display updates smoothly, LTC LED on
Watch the seconds column of the Lynx-2 display; the time
code value should start counting smoothly, without
jumping to a new value.
8. Repeat test Rewind direction.
Table Chapter 4 -3. Tach Pulse to Time Code Check Troubleshooting
Problem: Time code and tach positions do not correctly match.
Solutions:
• Check that the Lynx-2 is reading time code properly; In
play, the LTC LED should be on solid when time code is
connected.
• Check that the Lynx-2 has correctly identified the code
type that is striped on the reel.
• Check that the correct transport type has been selected
in the Lynx-2 setup menu.
• Check that the correct tach rate frequency has been
selected on the machine. Some transports have
internally selectable tach rates.
4-12
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Getting Started
Transport Control Check
Figure Chapter 4 -7. Front Panel Transport Control
The Lynx-2 module key switches can be used to directly control
the transport. Using the shifted function of the Lynx-2 front panel
each of the transport control functions can be checked.
1. Press [TRAN MODE]
ONLINE LED on
To perform these tests, the module should be online. Press
[TRAN MODE] if it is offline.
2. Press [SHIFT]+{>}
> in display, display updates
The transport should go into play.
3. Press [SHIFT]+{↑}
> in display, display updates, REH LED on
The transport should go into rehearse, if it allows that
feature. At least one track may have to be in record ready
on some machines.
4. Press [SHIFT]+{>}
> in display, display updates, REH LED off
Pressing PLAY cancels rehearse mode.
5. Press [SHIFT]+{REC}
> in display, display updates, REC LED on
The transport should go into record. Check that only
tracks where it is safe to go into record are in record ready.
6. Press [SHIFT]+{<<}
<< in display, display updates
The transport should go into rewind.
7. Press [SHIFT]+{>>}
>> in display, display updates
The transport should go into fast forward.
8. Press [SHIFT]+{■}
■
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
in display, display stops
The transport should go into stop.
4-13
Getting Started
Setup Options
For basic module operation, it is not necessary to configure any
other options. In some instances, the default transport Setup
Options must be customized for a particular situation. The
complete transport OPTions menu is as follows:
• Capst Wild = DC Capstan adjust
• Lifter mode = Lifter defeat control
• Phase mode = Phase mode on/off
• Pilot out mode = Generator or reader
• Relay mode = Mute relay control
• Serial TC inhibit = Serial Time Code ON/OFF
• Speed = Tape shuttle approach speed adjustment
Some of this operational data is unique to each transport and is
stored separately, in RAM, for each machine. Once set, these
optional parameters are recalled when the corresponding
transport is selected.
Figure Chapter 4 -8. Front Panel Setup Keys
1. Press [SHIFT] and [MSTR] simultaneously
Enter setup.
2. Press [GEN ON]
CAPST Wild is displayed
It is the first item in the options menu.
To select other items in the OPTions Menu, use the {LAST} and
{NEXT} keys to scroll left and right through the menu. Use the [↑]
and [↓] arrows to select the option that corresponds with your
operational requirements. See Appendix for more details.
3. Press [SHIFT] + [MSTR]
Exit setup mode and save your changes.
4-14
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Getting Started
Note:
Serial Time Code is only available from certain video transports. The
user has the option to read the Serial Time Code coming from the
machine. This option can be toggled on or off. The Lynx-2 will use
Serial Time Code when searching and locating, or for synchronization if
LTC is not present. Refer to Chapter 8, Time Code Reader for more
detailed information.
Chapter 6, Feature & Controls, covers these Options in greater detail.
The setup option parameters are not erased when [TRAN MODE]
and [CLR] are pushed simultaneously; this only resets the
transport parameters to the factory default.
Initial Synchronization
Verify that the Lynx-2 system is operating properly by following
the simplified synchronization procedures listed below.
By resolving and locking the tape machine to the system reference
the Lynx-2 capstan control function can be checked. The first
attempt at synchronization will be slightly slower as the Lynx-2
acquires the correct control frequency or DC conditions to lock the
transport.
Figure Chapter 4 -9. Front Panel Synchronization Setup Keys
1. Press [TRAN MODE]
ONLINE LED on
To perform these tests, the module should be online press
[TRAN MODE] if it is offline.
2. Press [GEN REF]
INT LED, or VID LED on
Press the generator reference key to select either INT
(internal crystal) or VID (external video) if a video sync
source is connected as the system speed reference.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
4-15
Getting Started
3. Press [MSTR]
Master LED on, 422 LED on
Press the [MSTR] key to enable the Lynx-2 module
synchronizer.
4. Press [MSTR REF]
GEN LED on
Press the [MSTR REF] key if the VSO LED is on, to select
GEN, as the master transport, speed reference.
5. Press PLAY (transport)
LTC, RESOLVE & LOCK LEDs on
The Lynx-2 module controls the tape machines' capstan
speed so that the time code runs at the same rate as the
system reference.
6. Press [DSPL SEL]
ERR LED on, display shows >L 0.00
Press the [DSPL SEL] key one or more times to select the
offset error display. The display is showing subframes.
You should see 0.00 subframe error, which indicates that
the machine is locked to the system reference.
7. Press STOP & PLAY (transport)
ERR LED on, Display shows >L 0.00
Stop the machine and then put it back into play, the
machine should lock much faster than the previous time.
The subframe error display should rapidly count down to
0.00 error.
4-16
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Getting Started
Table Chapter 4 -4. Initial Synchronization Troubleshooting
Problem: The machine will not lock at all.
Solutions:
• Check that the correct transport type is selected in
the Lynx-2 setup menu.
• Check that there is time code on the tape and that
the module LTC LED is on in play.
• Check that the machine is switched to external
capstan control.
Problem: The offset error display never stabilizes at 0.00.
Solutions:
• Check that the correct transport type is selected in
the Lynx-2 setup menu.
• Check that the machine is switched to external
capstan control.
If the transport capstan is DC controlled it may be necessary to
adjust the capstan wild speed trim so that the Lynx-2 default
control speed and the normal play speed of the transport are
similar. See the Features and Controls Section, for a more
detailed explanation.
Synchronizing Two Transports
These instructions assume that the two transports to be
synchronized have tapes with similar time codes and that there is
no time code offset. (In a system, each transport/Lynx-2 package
is considered a synchronized unit.)
Make sure that both modules are connected together as indicated
in the Installation Section and are configured as described earlier
in this chapter. Put both modules online by pressing the [TRAN
MODE] key.
Press PLAY on each transport so that the Lynx-2 reads the time
code positions from each tape.
Choose one of the Lynx-2 modules as Master and press the
[MSTR] key, the Master LED will light. The other module is the
Slave. The 422 LED on both modules will also light indicating
that the modules are communicating via the Lynx-2 system BUS.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
4-17
Getting Started
Press PLAY on the Master transport, followed by STOP. The
Slave transport will now search to the Master position and slightly
ahead of the Master. When the Slave transport has stopped, press
PLAY on the Master, the Slave machine will go into play and both
machines will lock.
Verify that both transports are "locked" by checking the Lock LED
on each module.
Note
The very first attempt at "lock" may take up to 10 seconds.
The Slave transport will now chase and lock to the Master
transport no matter how the Master transport is shuttled.
You can now reassign the Master status to the Slave sync unit.
This is done by pressing the [MSTR] key on the current Master,
the LED will go off. Next press the [MSTR] key on the module
that was the Slave to make it the new Master, the Master LED
will light.
You can reassign the Master at any time and all positional
relationships will be maintained. Any previous offsets will be
transferred to the new Slave machines.
Master Setup Procedures
Figure Chapter 4 -10. Front Panel Master Select
1. Press [DSPL SEL]
RDR LED on
Press the [DSPL SEL] key one or more times to turn on
RDR LED.
2. Press [TRAN MODE]
ONLINE LED on
Put the Master Lynx-2 online.
4-18
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Getting Started
3. Press PLAY (transport)
LTC LED on, Display updates
Allow the module to read time code for at least 10 seconds.
4. Press STOP (transport)
Display stops
Stop the transport. The Lynx-2 display will also stop.
5. Press [GEN REF]
INT LED on
Press the [GEN REF] key one or more times, to select the
Lynx-2 internal speed reference as the generator reference.
6. Press [MSTR]
MSTR LED on, 422 LED on
Defines the Master Lynx-2 and turns on RS422
communications to Slave Lynx-2 modules.
7. Press [MSTR REF]
GEN LED on
Select the GEN reference as the Master transport speed.
Slave Setup Procedure
8. Press [DSPL SEL]
RDR LED on
Press the [DSPL SEL] key one or more times to turn on
RDR LED.
9. Press PLAY (transport)
LTC LED on, Display updates
Allow the module to read time code for at least 10 seconds.
10. Press STOP (transport)
Display stops
Stop the transport. The Lynx-2 display will also stop.
11. Press [TRAN MODE]
ONLINE LED on
Put the Slave Lynx-2 online.
Synchronization Procedure
12. Press PLAY and STOP (Master transport)
Play the Master transport, the Slave will chase and park
slightly ahead of the Master machine.
13. Press PLAY (Master transport)
Play the Master transport, the slave will go into play.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
4-19
Getting Started
14. RESOLVE LED on
Lynx-2 has resolved the speed of the Master machine to the
reference, and the Slave transport to the Master transport.
It is within 1/4 frame of being locked.
15. LOCK LEDs on
When both Lynx-2 LOCK LEDs turn on, the transports are
synchronized and playing at the speed of the reference
source.
16. Press [DSPL SEL] slave
ERR LED on
Press the [DSPL SEL] key one or more times to turn on the
offset ERR LED. The display is showing subframes. You
should see >L 0.00. This means the Slave is locked to the
Master and the number indicates the accuracy of the lock,
to 1/100 of a frame.
17. Press STOP (Master transport)
The Master and Slave transports stop. Next, reverse the
Master/Slave relationship; make module #2 the Master and
#1 the Slave.
Reverse Master/Slave Relationship
18. Press [MSTR]
MSTR LED off
Press the [MSTR] key on module #1 and deselect it as
Master.
19. Press [MSTR]
MSTR LED on
Press the [MSTR] key on module #2. Check that the
generator and master reference selections on module #2 are
correctly set.
20. Repeat above steps 12-17.
4-20
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Getting Started
Synchronization with an OFFSET
Offset synchronization is used when two or more tapes have time
codes that do not match. For example, tape "A" may start at
00:00:00:00 and tape "B" at 02:00:00:00.
You can set the module controlling tape "B" so that there is a two
hour difference or offset. The Lynx-2 will automatically adjust
tape "B's" time code position to include the offset.
In a Lynx-2 system, Slave offsets are always displayed in the time
code type of the Master machine. In stand-alone operation, the
offset of the Master machine is always 0. In a TimeLine, post
production system, it is possible for the Master to have an offset.
Note:
An offset value cannot be entered into a Stand-alone Master module.
Any attempt to do so will produce the error message
“NO MSTR OFST”.
Example: Slave time code, minus Master time code, equals offset
between machines.
02:00:00:00 (Slave)
- 00:00:00:00 (Master)
= 02:00:00:00 Offset
Setting Up an OFFSET
For this example, it is necessary to have two reels of tape with
different time codes or two reels of tape with at least 10 minutes of
striped code.
Verify that the modules are correctly connected and have been
configured. Turn on the modules and wait for the initialization
sequence to finish.
For an example, we will use a Master tape striped with one hour
code and a Slave with three hour code and will enter an offset of
2 hours (02:00:00:00). The example can however, be performed
using any time code values.
Example:
03:00:00:00 (Slave tape time code)
- 01:00:00:00 (Master tape time code)
= 02:00:00:00 Offset
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
4-21
Getting Started
On the Slave, press [DSPL SEL] one or more times until the
OFFSET LED lights. This accesses the OFFSET register. Next
press [SET HOLD]. The Frames value starts to flash. Press the
[↓] or [↑] keys to change the Frames offset value. Each time you
press the [SET HOLD] key, the display cursor moves to the next
column in the display.
Figure Chapter 4 -11. Front Panel Offset Set and Store Keys
1. Press [DSPL SEL] (Slave)
OFFSET LED on
Press the display select key one or more times until the
OFFSET LED turns on.
2. Press [SET HOLD]
Frames display flashes
Press [↑] or [↓] to change the number of frames to be offset.
In this case the value should be :00. If there is a number in
the offset register, press [CLR] to enter 00:00:00:00.
3. Press [SET HOLD]
Seconds display flashes
Press [↑] or [↓] to change the number of Seconds to be
offset. In this case the value should be :00.
4. Press [SET HOLD]
Minutes display flashes
Press [↑] or [↓] to change the number of Minutes to be
offset. In this case the value should be :00.
5. Press [SET HOLD]
Hours display flashes
Press [↑] or [↓] to change the number of Hours to be offset.
In this case the value should be :02.
6. Press [STORE]
This stores the offset 02:00:00:00 in the offset register.
7. Press [DSPL SEL] (Slave)
RDR LED on
Press the [DSPL SEL] key one or more times until the
Slave RDR LED turns on.
4-22
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Getting Started
8. Press [DSPL SEL] (Master)
RDR LED on
Press the [DSPL SEL] key one or more times until the
Master RDR LED turns on.
9. Press [TRAN MODE] (Master and Slave)
ONLINE LEDs on
Put both modules online.
10. Press [MSTR] (Master)
MSTR LED on master module and MSTR and 422 LEDs on
slave modules
Select Lynx-2 #1 as the Master, and initiate 422
communications with the Slave modules. The Slave
module 422 LED goes on, verifying communications
between the Master and Slave.
11. Press PLAY (Master transport)
Play the Master machine. The Slave transport goes into
PLAY.
12. LTC, RESOLVE and LOCK LEDs on
Both machines lock and the resolve displays will increment
on both Slave and Master Lynx-2's. Notice that the Slave's
display is exactly 2 hours ahead of the Master.
Calculating an OFFSET
There are two ways to compute and enter offsets between Master
and Slave machines.
1. You calculate or have a known offset that is entered manually,
as described above.
2. You automatically capture (determine) and enter the offset by
using the sync point procedure described below.
For systems without an external controller, the following
procedure is performed on both Slave and Master modules. If you
are using an external controller, please refer to Synchronizing
Lynx-2 with the TimeLine Keyboard Control Unit (KCU).
The Lynx-2 will automatically calculate offset between time code
points numbered on each tape. These time code points are known
as sync points. Each Lynx-2 module has a sync point register that
can be captive or manually entered and trimmed.
Before automatically capturing an offset, the modules should
already be configured and have successfully completed their
individual time code checks, as described earlier in this chapter.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
4-23
Getting Started
Sync point/captive procedure can be performed with the modules
on or offline. If the modules are online it is not necessary to select
a Master, since the calculated offset will be correctly transferred
to the Slave module.
Figure Chapter 4 -12. Front Panel Sync Point/Set Hold Keys
1. Press PLAY (transport #1)
Move the tape to a position that you would like to define as
a Sync Point and STOP the transport.
2. Press [SYNC POINT + SET HOLD]
SYNC PT LED flashes (two seconds) then remains solid
Pressing the [SYNC POINT + SET HOLD] keys
simultaneously, captures the current time code reader
value in the Sync Point register. The SYNC PT LED comes
on to indicate an active sync point register.
3. Press PLAY (transport #2)
Move the second machine to the point that you wish to
match the sync point marked on the first machine.
4. Press [SYNC POINT + SET HOLD]
SYNC PT LED flashes (two seconds) then remains solid
Pressing the [SYNC POINT + SET HOLD] keys
simultaneously, captures the current time code reader
value in the Sync Point register. The Sync point LED
comes on to indicate an active sync point register.
5. Press [TRAN MODE]
ONLINE LED on
Puts all modules online.
6. Press [MSTR]
MSTR LED on, 422 LED on (all modules)
The Slave modules will automatically compute their offsets
relative to the Master.
Note:
Storing a sync point value of '0', or trimming an offset calculated using
sync points, will cancel the sync point and turn off the sync point LED.
4-24
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Getting Started
Trim an OFFSET
Sometimes an OFFSET must be trimmed. The offset value can be
increased or decreased in subframe increments (1/100 frame). For
information on how to trim an offset value from the KCU, refer to
the Keyboard Controller manual.
Offsets may be trimmed dynamically, while the tape is moving; by
pressing [DSPL SEL] one or more times until the OFFSET LED
comes on. Then press [SET HOLD] and use the [↓] or [↑] keys to
modify the offset, while simultaneously monitoring the Master and
Slave tapes. The Lynx-2 module will adjust the slave position so
that the new offset is correct. In this way, it is possible to adjust
two tape machines until the audio phases and they are in perfect
synchronization.
Figure Chapter 4 -13. Front Panel Offset Set and Trim Keys
1. Press [DSPL SEL]
OFFSET LED on
Press [DSPL SEL] one or more times until only the
OFFSET LED is on. The offset value will be displayed.
2. Press [SET HOLD]
Display flashes
The offset may now be adjusted using the [↓] or [↑] keys,
press [CLR] to set the offset to 00:00:00:00 and make the
register inactive. Press [SET HOLD] one or more times to
advance to the display column to be adjusted. An offset
value may be adjusted in subframe (1/100th frame)
increments. Press the [SET HOLD] key to step to the
subframe column. Adjusting the offset may be done while
the tapes are moving.
3. Press [STORE]
Display stops flashing
Stores the value currently displayed in the offset register.
To exit offset adjust without storing the current value,
press and hold [SET HOLD] until the display stops
flashing.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
4-25
Getting Started
Manually Set or Trim a Sync Point
In some instances, it is preferable to adjust or store a new master
sync point and thereby cause all Slave machines to simultaneously
recalculate their offsets rather than individually adjusting each
offset.
Figure Chapter 4 -14. Front Panel Sync Point Trim and Set Keys
1. Press [DSPL SEL]
SYNC PT LED on
Press [DSPL SEL] one or more times until only the SYNC
PT LED is on. The sync point value is displayed.
2. Press [SET HOLD]
Display flashes
The sync point may now be adjusted using the [↓] and [↑]
keys. Press [CLR] to set the sync point to 00:00:00:00 and
make the register inactive. Press [SET HOLD] one or more
times to advance to the display column to be adjusted.
3. Press [STORE]
00:00:00:00
Stores the value currently displayed in the SYNC PT register.
Locating to a Sync Point
When a Lynx-2 module is offline, the sync point register can be
used as a single point autolocator.
Figure Chapter 4 -15. Front Panel Sync Point Key
1. Press [TRAN MODE]
ONLINE LED off
Take the Lynx-2 module offline.
2. Press [SYNC POINT]
Press the [SYNC POINT] key at any time to return to and
park the machines at the sync point.
4-26
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Getting Started
Synchronizing Lynx-2s with a KCU Controller
Figure Chapter 4 -16. Synchronizing Lynx-2s with a KCU Controller
Multiple video (or video and audio) transports may be
synchronized with a controller or editor such as TimeLine's
Keyboard Control Unit (KCU). The controller will simplify
operations in situations where offsets change frequently.
To verify that the system is correctly connected, refer to
Figure 4-2.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
4-27
Getting Started
The following connections must be made for a KCU machine
control system.
• EXT VIDEO: Connect a video sync cable between the external
video reference and each Lynx-2 module. This can be done by
looping from one module to the next. (Only required if video or
digital audio machines are used.)
• RS422: Connect an RS422 cable between the KCU and each
Lynx-2 module. This can be done by looping from one module
to the next.
• TRANSPORT: Connect a transport cable between each
machine and its controlling Lynx-2 module.
• TC IN: Connect a time code cable between each machine and
its controlling Lynx-2 module.
Figure Chapter 4 -17. Front Panel Setup for KCU Operation
1. Press [Power switch]
Module turns on
Turn on both Lynx-2 units. Confirm the setup parameters
of each Lynx-2 as described at the beginning of this
chapter.
2. Press [TRAN MODE]
ONLINE LED on
Put both modules online.
Remember: Give each module a unique address. If the KCU
detects that the modules have the same address, the KCU will not
poll correctly and the message: "Press the 'Poll' key to establish
communications," will be displayed on the KCU.
The Lynx-2 power-on sequence displays the serial address of each
module. If you need to review or change the address of a module,
press [SHIFT] + [MSTR] simultaneously, then [GEN CODE] to
access the address menu. Use the [↓] and [↑] keys to make
changes. Press [SHIFT] + [MSTR] to exit setup
3. Press PLAY (transport)
Display incrementing, VID LED on
Let the Lynx-2 modules read time code for 10 seconds.
4. Press STOP (transport)
Display stops
The Lynx-2s are ready to be controlled by the KCU, an
editor or other external controller.
4-28
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Getting Started
Setup The KCU
Note:
To operate the KCU with the Lynx-2 module, the KCU processor board
must be modified. See the Appendix for Service Bulletin (SB91-003)
modification instructions. If your KCU operates with KCU080-14
software or higher, this modification has already been completed.
1. Turn on the keyboard control power supply unit. The KCU
will automatically poll the Lynx-2, RS422 Control BUS to
establish communications with the module. The LEDs
corresponding to the addresses previously set on the modules
will light. The 422 LEDs on each module will come on. The
number of lit LEDs should match the number of connected
modules. If not, see Table 4-3.
2. Press [SETUP] than [SYS] (KCU)
Enter setup mode to select a system speed reference source.
Press [0] (KCU keypad)
SYSTEM OPTIONS displayed
Use the KCU [+] and [-] keys to select Ext Vid or Int-Xtl as
the system reference source.
3. Press [SETUP] (KCU)
GRP Message displayed
Press [SETUP] to exit setup mode. The KCU will display
the following message: "Hold the 'GRP' key, and add the
groups in order of priority."
4. Press [GRP] + [A] (KCU)
"A" turns on
Assign the transports to the machine group by
simultaneously pressing [GRP] and the letter
corresponding with each Lynx-2 address.
The first machine selected is designated as the
Master/reference transport and is indicated with a capitol
letter/asterisk.
Repeat step 4, for each transport. Notice if there is a dash
under the machine's letter, this indicates that the machine
assigned to this particular address is offline.
Remember: [A] is assigned to the Lynx-2 with address #1, [B]
to #2, and so on for the rest of the modules.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
4-29
Getting Started
5. Press [TRAN MODE]
ONLINE LED on
If any modules are offline, put them online. The dash
under the letter on the KCU display changes to a dot, this
confirms that the assigned Lynx-2 is online.
Check the KCU System
The following procedure will help verify that all of the Lynx-2
modules and transports will operate correctly with the KCU in
both solo and group mode. Any offsets previously entered on a
Lynx-2 unit will be overwritten by the KCU.
1. Press [SOLO] then [A] (KCU)
SOLO:A displayed
This 'solos' the transport assigned to the [A] key.
2. Press [PLAY] (KCU)
SOLO:A>L displayed on the KCU
Play the transport for 10 seconds to allow the Lynx-2 to
read the time code and lock. If you don't get a lock
indication, refer to Chapter 5.
3. Press STOP (KCU)
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each transport.
4. Press [GRP] (KCU)
A B C D E F displayed on the KCU
The online status of all assigned Lynx-2s is displayed.
5. Press [STOP] (KCU)
Selected machine CH displayed on the KCU
Press [STOP] on the KCU, the Slave transports will chase
and park to the current position of the Master transport.
6. Press [PLAY] (KCU)
You should see all transports play and show lock.
4-30
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Getting Started
Table Chapter 4 -5. KCU Troubleshooting With an External Controller.
Problem: Communication errors at KCU, or communications
are established and then drop.
Solution:
• Check the Lynx-2 addresses, each Lynx-2 must have a
unique address. If two modules have the same address,
a communications conflict occurs.
Note: To operate the KCU with the Lynx-2 module, the KCU
processor board must be modified. See the Appendix
for
Service Bulletin (SB91-003) modification instructions.
If your KCU operates with KCU080-14 software or
higher, this modification has already been completed.
Problem: Press POLL on KCU but nothing happens. All the
KCU address LEDs come on.
Solutions:
• Check the cabling.
• Check the video reference.
• Check the KCU software version. If old KCU software
version is being used, then Lynx-2 module Editor
setting needs to be set to "Old KCU".
(See Features and Controls.)
Problem: When using the KCU, the display shows No Code
(NC).
Solutions:
• Check the time code cable to the module.
• Check the LTC LED on the Lynx-2 module.
• Check the audio output level of the time code track on
the transport.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
4-31
Getting Started
4-32
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
Error Messages
Introduction
The Lynx-2 module provides several levels of user information:
system error messages, messages and warnings.
System error messages are displayed when the Lynx-2 is unable
to perform due to a system failure or communications
discontinuity.
Warnings are displayed if an illegal combination of commands is
entered, or a condition exists that the operator may need to be
aware of.
Messages are displayed to provide the user with system
information, when a command sequence is entered incorrectly or a
precondition is required for a command to operate.
System Error Messages
System error messages are automatically displayed. When an
error occurs, normal operation can continue provided that
communications between each piece of the system have not been
completely lost.
BIPHASE Err
Cause: The film processor option board lost communications with
the Lynx-2 main board.
Solution: Press [CLR] and/or cycle power. If this does not correct
the problem, contact the factory.
Buffer Ovfl
Cause: Too many deferred messages have been received from an
external controller for the Lynx-2 RS422 serial receive buffers.
Solution: Press [CLR] to cancel the error message. If this does
not correct the problem, contact the factory.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
5-1
Troubleshooting
Checksum Err
Cause: The front panel has received corrupted data, an
unrecognizable message, or invalid token from the main board.
Incompatible main board and front panel S/W version
Comm Timeout
Cause: Communications failure between the main board and the
front panel or remote front panel. The front panel software has a
25 second time out and will display this message if
communications are dropped. This would normally only be caused
by connecting a front panel after the module has been powered up.
It is possible for the LEDs and display to be functioning, but the
key switches to be dead.
Solution: Check the front panel to main board or remote panel to
AUX connector connections and repower the Lynx-2.
DEFER Error
Cause: An unknown deferred message was received on the Lynx
RS422 communications bus.
Solution: Press [CLR] to cancel the error message. If this does
not correct the problem, contact the factory.
Error C00
Cause: A transport capstan table error has occurred. The Lynx-2
module was unable to find a value.
Solution: Power cycle the module. If this does not correct the
problem, contact the factory.
Error TA00
Cause: A transport tach table error has occurred. The Lynx-2
module was unable to find a value.
Solution: Power cycle the module. If this does not correct the
problem, contact the factory.
Error TXT00
Cause: Lynx-2 communications bus, pin 5 frame timing has failed.
Solution: Power cycle the module. If this does not correct the
problem, contact the factory.
5-2
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Troubleshooting
Error PT00
Cause: Pilot tone output generation has failed.
Solution: Power cycle the module. If this does not correct the
problem, contact the factory.
INIT Error
Cause: The film processor board was unable to establish
communications on power up.
Solution: Power cycle the module. If this does not correct the
problem, contact the factory.
MSG Ovfl Err
Cause: A deferred message that is too long was received on the
Lynx RS422 communications bus.
Solution: Press [CLR] to cancel the error message. If this does
not correct the problem, contact the factory.
MSTR REF Err
Cause: If the generator reference [GEN REF] is selected to reader
the master reference {MSTR REF] can not be GEN but must be
selected to VSO.
Solution: Select VSO as the master reference.
PCB Error
Cause: Incorrect software is fitted for the hardware configuration.
Solution: Contact your local dealer or the factory for assistance.
RS422 Error
Cause: An unknown message was received on the Lynx RS422
communications bus.
Solution: Press [CLR] to cancel the error message. If this does
not correct the problem, contact the factory.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
5-3
Troubleshooting
Warnings
CALIBR''N Err
Cause: The Lynx-2 was unable to calibrate the capstan outputs on
power up.
Solution: Press [CLR] to cancel the error message.
CAPSTAN Err
Cause: The transport capstan servo is not responding to
synchronization control.
Solution: Make sure that the correct transport is selected and
that the transport is set for external control.
GEN LOCK Err
Cause: The generator servo has lost lock because the generator
reference is not present.
Solution: Restore or change the generator reference source. Press
[CLR] to cancel the error message.
GEN REF Err
Cause: An attempt to change the generator reference source was
made when the module is selected as Master. A change to the
reference source would cause an interruption to the Lynx-2 frame
bus signal.
Solution: Deselect the Lynx-2 master and then change the
reference source.
LYNX OFFLINE
Cause: An attempt to put the Lynx-2 module online has been
made at a remote panel when the local panel has not been
enabled.
Solution: Put the module on line locally first.
SERIAL Error
Cause: The transport is not responding to serial control and the
serial line communications have timed out.
5-4
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Troubleshooting
Solution: Make sure that the cable is properly connected to the
transport. Check that the correct transport type has been selected
in the transport setup menu.
Sony NAK Err
Cause: A Sony serially controlled transport has responded with a
negative acknowledge (NAK) to a Lynx-2 command.
Solution: Power cycle the module. Check the correct transport
type has been selected in the transport setup menu. If this does
not correct the problem, contact the factory.
Ampex CHKSUM
Cause: An Ampex serially controlled transport has responded with
unrecognized message header, NAK or checksum error to a Lynx-2
command.
Solution: Make sure that the cable is properly connected to the
transport. Check that the correct transport type has been selected
in the transport setup menu.
Sony CHKSUM
Cause: A serial checksum error has occurred with the selected
Sony transport.
Solution: Make sure that the cable is properly connected to the
transport. Check that the correct transport type has been selected
in the transport setup menu.
- UNREF'D JAM Cause: The reader input can not be confirmed as resolved to the
generator reference. It is likely that the generator and reader are
running at different rates.
Solution: Resolve the transport to the generator reference.
VARI REF Err
Cause: A cross lock or varispeed master can not have a master
reference set to VSO or if the master reference is selected to GEN
the generator reference can not be RDR.
Solution: Select a valid master reference.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
5-5
Troubleshooting
Messages
Calibrating
Cause: The Lynx-2 module as part of its power up initialization
sequence is calibrating the capstan servo output for all three tape
speeds.
DONE
Cause: The initial Lynx-2 configuration process has been
completed. Press [STORE] to save your selections and complete
configuration.
Generator ON
Cause: An attempt to change the Generator reference source or
code type has been made while the generator is running.
Solution: Turn the generator off before making a change.
-- GEN PRESET -Cause: The generator start time has been set to the time code
value in the preset register by pressing the [SHIFT] and [GEN
CODE] keys simultaneously.
Ignored
Cause: An external video reference source has been detected, but
because VID is not selected as the generator reference it has been
ignored.
---- JAM ---Cause: Either an automatic or manual generator time code jam
operation has occurred. The time code output will jump to the
current reader value and continue to generate time code.
Master ON
Cause: A Lynx-2 front panel transport command has been
attempted when the module is a master.
-- NO CODE -Cause: The Lynx-2 module is online, in play and there is no time
code or pilot tone input.
5-6
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Troubleshooting
Solution: Check that there is time code on tape and a time code
cable connected to the TC IN jack.
-- Play 30 -Cause: Confirmation of change of transport tape speed. The Tach
to time code frame relationship indicates a play speed of 30 ips.
-- Play 15 -Cause: Confirmation of change of transport tape speed. The Tach
to time code frame relationship indicates a play speed of 15 ips.
-- Play 7.5 -Cause: Confirmation of change of transport tape speed. The Tach
to time code frame relationship indicates a play speed of 7.5 ips.
TAPE OUT
Cause: The specified transport is not responding to a Lynx-2
motion command. The most common cause for this message is
that the tape has spooled off the machine.
Solution: Check that there is tape threaded on the machine.
TRAN CLR
Cause: A [CLR] + [TRAN MODE] command has been issued to the
module. The Lynx-2 will reset the synchronizer transport
parameters to the factory default values.
TimeLine
Cause: TimeLine corporate logo, displayed each time that the
module powers up.
Video = NTSC
Cause: The Lynx-2 external video detect routine has detected an
NTSC video sync signal.
Video = PAL
Cause: The Lynx-2 external video detect routine has detected a
PAL video sync signal.
NO MSTR OFST
Cause: An attempt has been made to enter an offset into a Lynx-2
Stand-alone Master module.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
5-7
Troubleshooting
Solution: Re-enter the offset into a slave module.
5-8
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Troubleshooting
NO FILM JMPR
Cause: Lynx Film Interface software version .001 or higher
requires a jumper modification to the film processor board.
Solution: Refer to Service Bulletin SB94-004 for update
specifications
Self Test Messages
The Lynx-2 front panel has a Self Test procedure, that is entered
by pressing [SHIFT] + [↓] + [MAST REF]. There are three
sections to the self test procedure, LED tests, key test and display
test. Once in self test press [SHIFT] + [↑] or [↓] to step to the next
test section. The following messages and information are
displayed during the self test process. To exit self test the module
must be powered down.
LED Tests # 10-15
There are six LED tests in the self test procedure. Press the [↑]
and [↓] keys to step through each test.
10 Left side LED brightness matching.
11 Right side brightness matching.
12 All LEDs on test.
13 Red LEDs on only test.
14 Yellow LEDs on only test.
15 Green LEDs on only test.
Display Tests
Press [SHIFT] + [↑] or.[↓] to step to the display tests. Use the [↑]
and [↓] to select one of the three display tests.
Horizontally scrolling ASCII character set.
All display pixels on.
Vertically scrolling ASCII character set.
Key Test
Press [SHIFT] + [↑] or [↓] to step to the key test. The display will
indicate the key number of the key that is being pressed.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
5-9
Troubleshooting
No keys pressed
Cause: The front panel key test routine is entered. Press keys to
confirm that they are being correctly scanned. Press [SHIFT] + [↑
] or [↓] to exit the key test routine and step to one of the other tests
or power cycle the module to leave self test.
5-10
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Troubleshooting
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
5-11
Chapter 6 Features and Controls
Introduction
The Lynx-2 Time Code Module contains four independent,
functional units.
• Time code generator
• Time code reader
• Transport synchronizer/resolver
• Asynchronous communications interface
The Lynx-2 can also be fitted with either a film processor (biphase
reader, generator) or a VITC reader option board.
The front panel controls provide the user with access to, and
visual feedback for all of the Lynx-2 functions. It is important to
understand that the front panel keys, LEDs and display are multifunctional.
The front panel indicators and display have been designed to
provide the maximum level of user information. The LED layout
is grouped by function: the left side of the front panel indicating
the transport and synchronizer status and the right side of the
panel indicating generator and system reference status.
Features - Front Panel
•
•
•
•
•
•
16-character, alpha-numeric, dot matrix, time code display.
Comprehensive LED status indicators.
Front panel transport remote control mode, with single point
search to cue.
Record, rehearse and tape speed LED status indicators.
Designed to be remotely located from the module chassis.
(An optional, remote mounting kit with blank front panel is
available).
Removable front panel permits access to the system software
PROM, generator, reshape and pilot output adjustment pots,
the module’s ground isolation jumpers, and the module’s Serial
Number.
Generator
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
6-1
Features and Controls
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Generates all worldwide time code standards: SMPTE (DF
and NDF), EBU, Film.
MIDI time code.
Selection of internal, video, pilot, mains or reader as generator ref.
External video sync input accepts NTSC or PAL, black burst,
composite video or composite sync.
Access to time code User Bits.
Automatic or manual jam sync modes.
Pilot field rate output (60, 59.94, 50, 48 Hz), locked to
generator.
Reader
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wideband, bi-directional operation, 1/10 to 60x play speed.
Automatic detection of time code type, over a wide range of
input levels.
Selectable time code reader input bandwidth filter.
Code-type LED indicators.
LED indicators showing valid LTC, VITC or serial time code.
User bits display.
Automatic display of subframe offset errors in the ERR mode.
Reader display “hold” function.
Reshaped time code and Pilot Tone output locked to Reader.
Synchronizer
•
•
•
•
•
Rapid locate and sync lock-up time.
Subframe offsets supported.
Supports wide-band LTC, VITC, serial time code or TACH for
location.
Automatic switch over to Pilot Tone input for continued
synchronization if time code is lost.
Speed-only resolver from either time code or Pilot Tone input.
Communications
•
•
•
•
•
6-2
Industry standard RS422 serial data at 38.4 kilobaud.
Serial data communication via 9-pin, “D” subminiature
connectors, as per SMPTE standard. Communications “Daisy
chained” between Lynx-2 modules and controller.
Serial data cable length up to 1000 ft. (300 meters) maximum.
8-pin Din Macintosh computer interface port.
15-pin “Sub-D” connector AUX communications serial port.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Features and Controls
Additional Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
Compatible with all existing Lynx systems.
Built-in serial transport control interface.
User selectable Serial Time Code synchronization.
Masterless system; any machine may be selected as master.
All machines (including master) resolve to the selected
reference speed.
Built-in Gearbox processor function permits X-Frame
synchronization. And, with the TimeLine KCU, variable speed
synchronization.
Built-in support for Sony 5800 series VCRs.
Serial Number
Always refer to the serial number and software version when consulting with your dealer or the factory. The number is located behind the removable front panel.
The serial number is recorded at the factory to track software,
hardware, and other engineering changes.
Option Cards
Film Processor: A special plug-in interface card allows seamless
integration of sprocketed film transports into a Lynx-2 machine
control system.
Machine Interfaces
The Lynx-2 provides direct selection of transports from the
following manufacturers:
AEG, Akai, Alesis, Ampex, Denon, Fostex, JVC, 3M, Mitsubishi,
Otari, Panasonic, Saturn, Sony, Stellavox, Studer, Tascam
Editor Interfaces
The Lynx-2 supports direct connection to an editor machine port,
using Ampex VPR-3 serial communications. It will also connect
directly to digital audio workstations with VPR-3 machine control
capability.
Complete emulation of video tape transport; locks audio transport
to video sync reference. Accepts video editor commands. Reports
transport status to editor.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
6-3
Features and Controls
Front Panel Controls and Indicators
Figure Chapter 6 -1. Lynx-2 Front Panel
This section identifies each functional block on the front panel of
the Lynx-2 Time Code Module. The function of each key and LED
indicator is described in detail.
The Lynx-2 front panel switches are used in one of three operational modes, directly, shifted and in setup. The shifted functions
are indicated above the switches and are accessed by simultaneously pressing the blue shift key and the desired function key.
The setup functions are indicated below the switches. Setup mode
is accessed by simultaneously pressing the blue shift key and the
[MSTR] key. Setup mode is “latched” and the setup menus and
functions can be directly accessed. To exit setup mode, press shift
and [MSTR] again.
SHIFT Key
All front panel keys except for the [SHIFT] key, permit access to
multiple functions. The [SHIFT] key is a single function key used
in conjunction with other keys, to access the second- and thirdlevel functions of each key.
The [SHIFT] key must be pressed and held when a shifted function is selected. The shifted function is indicated above each key.
For example, when the [SHIFT] and [GEN REF] keys are pressed
simultaneously, the time code reader BWL (bandwidth limit) filter
is activated.
Pressing the [SHIFT] and [MSTR] keys together permits access to
the Lynx-2 module setup menus.
The setup menu function of each key is indicated beneath each
key. For example, when the [SHIFT] and [MSTR] keys are
pressed simultaneously, followed by the [GEN REF] key, the
AUX-1 menu is activated.
In this section, the shifted and setup functions are indicated by { }.
For example, {MODE}.
6-4
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Features and Controls
Display
The Lynx-2 has a bright, 16-character, high resolution dot matrix
time code display. The display provides the user with time code
status for all of the necessary time code registers and also an easy
method of entering and modifying time code data, by using the set
hold and store keys. In Setup, the display is used to provide a
clear and simple method of configuring the Lynx-2 menu options.
In normal operation, the characters at the left and right sides of
the display are used to convey additional system information.
Left side of display, irrespective of time code source selected:
> Machine is in play
G Machine is in search
>> Machine is in fast forward
<< Machine is rewind
Left side of display, when ERR display is selected:
>L Machine is in play and locked to the system reference
>XL Machine is in play and cross frame locked to the system
reference
>VL Machine is in play and varispeed lock. The module may also
be cross framed to the system reference.
Right side of time code display
.00 Subframe (1/100 frame) offset error displayed
UB Time code user bits displayed
TC Time code position displayed. TC is only shown when the
Lynx-2 is fitted with an option card that permits the display
to be updated from a second source (i.e., biphase).
Bi Biphase position displayed
Pr Preset displayed
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
6-5
Features and Controls
Master Reference Controls and Indicators
The [MSTR REF] key is used to select the synchronizer Master
machine reference. It toggles between GEN and VSO.
• When GEN is selected, the generator reference is used as the
master reference source.
When VSO (Variable Speed Override) is selected, the master
machine play speed is used as the master reference source.
• Pressing the [SHIFT] and [MSTR REF] keys simultaneously,
displays the software version installed in the Lynx-2 module.
• In setup, the [MSTR REF] key access the AUX 2 menu, this
menu is not currently used.
Figure Chapter 6 -2. Master Reference Controls and Indicators
GEN LED
There are two choices of Master reference: Gen or VSO. When
Gen is selected, the generator reference source is used as the system speed reference. When VSO is selected, the speed of the
Master transport is used as the system speed reference.
Press the [MSTR REF] key to select either Gen or VSO. As
indicated by the brackets on the front panel when Gen is selected,
the Master reference is the same as the generator reference.
INT - The module’s internal crystal
VID - An external video source
AUX - An external auxiliary source
MAINS - The module’s AC power line frequency,
which have all previously been described.
VSO LED
When the VSO (Variable Speed Override) LED is lit, it indicates
that the Lynx-2 is not controlling the Master machine and that is
running at its own play speed.
In VSO, the incoming speed of the Master machine time code is
used as the Master reference and passed down to the slaves as the
play speed reference for synchronization.
6-6
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Features and Controls
The master transport’s VSO control can be altered, thus affecting
the play-speed of the entire system. Using VSO as the MSTR REF
also provides a “code only” master environment, so that the
system can lock to a “wild” time code.
When in VSO mode, the Lynx-2 module will track the speed of the
master transport up to ±15% of numerical play speed. A disadvantage of using VSO as the MSTR REF is that wow and flutter may
be passed down from the master to slaves. This effect is minimized by digital filtering in the Lynx-2 module.
Remember, AUX, MAINS and RDR/VSO are non-standard speed
reference sources.
MSTR Key
The [MSTR] key is used, to designate a Lynx-2 module as the system Master. The module must be ONLINE to be selected as master. The MSTR LED and the 422 LED will light. Once a master is
selected, the [MSTR] keys on all other modules in the system are
deactivated.
A new Master can be selected at any time by:
1. Pressing the [MSTR] key on the current master so that the
MSTR LED turns off.
2. Pressing the [MSTR] key on the module that you would like to
be the new master.
Remember, any module can be master.
The [MSTR] key is only active if you are not using an editor or controller. When a controller is used, the master selection is done by
the controller.
Pressing the [SHIFT] and [MSTR] keys simultaneously, puts the
module into setup mode. The setup mode is used for Lynx-2 setup,
initialization and option menu selections. Access to each option
menu is either by pressing the [TRAN MODE] key one or more
times or directly. The keys used for direct menu access are indicated under each key. The arrow under the [MSTR] key indicates
that the setup functions are active. See the Appendix for a complete transport setup menu.
RS422 LED
When on, the 422 LED indicates that the Lynx-2 is either transmitting or receiving RS422 serial data. All 422 LEDs should be on
in a KCU system or SAL system when the Master is selected.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
6-7
Features and Controls
Time Code Generator: Controls and Indicators
The LEDs below the generator heading indicate generator status
information. The keys below the LEDs are used to select generator code type, generator mode and reference source, and turn the
generator on/off. For further information on the Lynx-2 generator
functions see the Time Code Generator Section.
Figure Chapter 6 -3. Generator Controls and Indicators
GEN CODE Key
The [GEN CODE] key is used to toggle through the various combinations of speed and code type. Each time you press the key, the
next time code type is selected. The LEDs light up in the following
sequence:
1. 29.97 and 30: SMPTE non-drop at 29.97 fps
2. 30: SMPTE non-drop at 30.00 fps
3. 29.97 and DF: SMPTE drop frame at 29.97 fps
4. DF: SMPTE drop frame at 30.00 fps
5. 25: EBU Code
6. 24: Film Code
Jam
Pressing the [SHIFT] and [GEN CODE] keys simultaneously, has
two functions. When the generator is off, this presets the generator start time to the value stored in the generator preset register.
The default generator preset value is 00:59:45:00. Any value can
be stored in the generator preset register by pressing [DSPL SEL]
to select the generator, and [SHIFT] and [DSPL SEL] to toggle the
display to the preset register. The generator preset is indicated by
a “Pr” in the right of the display; use the set hold and store
method of entry to update the value. A “Gen Preset” message is
displayed each time the generator start time is updated.
Pressing the [SHIFT] and [GEN CODE] keys simultaneously
when the generator is on, allows you to manually jam the reader
value into the generator register. It is only possible to manually
jam time code when the generator is in normal mode (i.e., no other
jam function has been selected).
6-8
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Features and Controls
ADDR
In setup, the [GEN CODE] key, accesses the module’s address,
editor type and master transmission type menu.
The module address is used when a Lynx-2 module is part of a system that is managed by an edit controller. Within such a system,
each module must have a unique address for the controller to correctly communicate. Addresses are assigned between ‘0’ and ‘127’.
The default address is ‘1’.
Note
No two modules in a system can have the same address.
Table Chapter 6 -1. ADDR Setup Menu
•
•
•
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
KEY
MENU
SUB-MENU
RANGE
GEN CODE
ADDR
Address
0 - 127
Editor
KCU
Old KCU
CMX
GVG
ACE
Mstr type
V500
V7/600
VRC2
BOSS
CASS
POGOL
TLC
When the Lynx-2 module is used as part of a system managed
by an edit controller, the edit controller type must be defined.
Once you’ve entered the ADDRess setup menu, press [NEXT]
to step to the editor select table.
Use the [↑] and [↓] keys to move through the list of controllers.
Select the controller that you are using from this list and press
[SHIFT] and [MSTR] to exit and save this selection as part of
the module’s default setup. Once selected, the Lynx-2 will initialize to this editor type each time the module is powered up.
When the Lynx-2 module is used in SAL mode, the Master
RS422 message transmission type must be defined. Setup
menu option, “Master”, in the Lynx-2 module is used to determine SAL X-frame rate operation. To enter setup, press the
module [SHIFT] and [MSTR] keys together. Press the {ADDR}
key, the “Editor and Address” column is displayed, then use
the FORW and BACK keys until “Master” is displayed. The
Master option defaults to V600, which should only be used if
all the modules in the system are Lynx-2’s or are Lynx
modules fitted with V600 software.
6-9
Features and Controls
•
When this option is set to V600, the “time line” rate and code
type information is transmitted over the serial port, so that
more than one Lynx-2 or V600 module can be cross frame synchronized, simultaneously in SAL operation. If there are any
modules with V500-26 or earlier software in the system, use
the [↑] and [↓] keys to set the Master option to V500.
GEN CODE LEDs
The Lynx-2 module can generate all worldwide standard time
codes. When the generator reference is set to internal crystal
(INT), the user can define the speed and code type as needed. If
INT is not selected, code type selection is restricted by the choice
of reference source. The LEDs above the [GEN CODE] key indicate the speed and code type that has been selected.
Figure Chapter 6 -4. Code Type Control
29.97 LED
When the 29.97 LED is illuminated, it indicates that time code is
being generated at a speed of 29.97 fps. This is the NTSC color
speed reference and the NTSC color standard.
The 29.97 LED can be lit in combination with the DF LED and 30
LED. If the DF and 29.97 LEDs are lit, this indicates that the
generator’s speed is 29.97 fps and the code type is DF. This is the
common broadcast configuration.
If the 30 and 29.97 LEDs are lit, this indicates that the speed is
29.97 and the code type is NDF. This is the standard music recording format.
When the Lynx-2 generator reference is NTSC video, the 29.97
LED will automatically light, to indicate the incoming reference
source rate.
If the 29.97 LED flashes in combination with the 25 or 24 LED’s,
it indicates that the generator is X-frame locked to an NTSC reference source. 25-frame code will be generated at 24.975 fps and
24-frame code will be generated at 23.976 fps.
6-10
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Features and Controls
30 LED
The 30 LED indicates that the time code being generated is
SMPTE 30 frame code (non-drop). This LED does not indicate
whether the frame rate is 30 or 29.97 fps. That indication is provided by the 29.97 LED.
DF LED
The DF LED indicates that the time code being generated is the
SMPTE “drop frame” code type. This LED does not indicate
whether the frame rate is 30 fps or 29.97 fps. That indication is
provided by the 29.97 LED.
DF, is a non-linear counting system that “drops” certain numbers
every hour so that the time code module’s display and the elapsed
time, when running at a frame rate of 29.97, will match. A total of
108 frames are dropped during each hour of program time, allowing the time code display to catch up to the actual elapsed time.
The Lynx-2 will generate DF code at 29.97 and 30 fps rates. Drop
frame code running at 30 fps is a non-standard code.
25 LED
The 25 LED indicates that the time code being generated is
25-frame EBU code, running at a speed of 25 fps. When the
Lynx-2 reference source is PAL video or 50 cycle AC MAINS, this
code type is automatically selected.
24 LED
The 24 LED indicates that the time code being generated is
24-frame film code, running at a speed of 24 fps. This is the
standard film rate.
GEN ON Key
The [GEN ON] key is used to:
• Turn the generator on and off. The LED directly above the
[GEN ON] key lights when the generator is running
• Pressing the [SHIFT] and [GEN ON] keys simultaneously,
allows generator mode selections to be made.
• In setup, the [GEN ON] key accesses the OPTions menu. The
options are described in more detail below.
Generator Mode
[SHIFT] and [GEN ON] allows you to select a generator mode.
The mode may only be changed when the generator is stopped.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
6-11
Features and Controls
To select a generator mode, press and hold the [SHIFT] key then
press [GEN ON] to toggle through each of the choices in the generator mode section. When no LEDs are lit, the Lynx-2 is in the
Normal or default mode.
In normal mode, when the generator is running, you may press
[SHIFT] and [GEN CODE] simultaneously, to momentarily “jam”
(or insert) the current reader time code value into the generator
register. The generator continues to generate sequential time code
from the jam time code value.
Figure Chapter 6 -5. Generator Modes
Care should be taken when jamming and restriping time code that
the source transport is resolved to the generator reference. A
“Gen Ref ERR” display message will be displayed if the incoming
code is a different code type, or not referenced to the generator.
Options Setup Menu
To access the OPTions menu, press [SHIFT] and [MSTR]
simultaneously, then press [GEN ON]. The OPTions menu
provides access to the following module options:
• Capstan Wild Speed
• Generator Message Hold
• Lifter Defeat
• Locate Speed
• Lock Delay
• Lock Window
• Mute Relay
• Park Ahead
• Phase Lock
• Pilot Out
• Sample Rate
• Serial Initialization
• Serial Tape E/E
• Serial Time Code
• Serial Time Code Lock
• Video Park Window
• X-frame Generator
6-12
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Features and Controls
To select items in the OPTions Menu, use the [NEXT] and [LAST]
keys to scroll left and right through the menu. Use the [↑] and [↓]
arrows to set the option that corresponds with your operational
requirements.
Table Chapter 6 -2. OPT Setup Menu
KEY
MENU
SUB-MENU
RANGE
GEN ON
OPT
Capst wild
Gen msg hold
-128 - +127
OFF
ON
OFF
AUTO
WIND
ALWAYS
20 - 255
0-50 frames
0-75 subframes
NORMAL
UNTIL RSLV
UNTIL LOCK
NOT LCK/STP
IF NOT LOCK
0 - 30
ON
OFF
GEN
RDR
48
44.1
ON
OFF
TAPE
LCL
AUTO
OFF[TT1]
LTC/VITC
LTC
VITC
ON
OFF
0-10 frames
ON
OFF
Lift dft
Locate speed
Lock delay
Lock window
Mute
Park ahead
Phase lock
Pilot out
Sample rate
Ser init
Ser tape/ee
Ser TC
Ser TC lock
Vid park win
X-frame gen
Press [SHIFT] and [MSTR] to exit and save these selections as
part of the module’s default setup. Once selected, the Lynx-2 will
initialize to these settings each time the module is powered-up.
The transport related setup options are sorted in the transport
table. If a new transport is selected, the default values are loaded
for the transport. The previous changes will be retained with the
old transport and restored when that transport is re-selected.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
6-13
Features and Controls
Capstan Wild Speed
It allows the “wild speed” of a machine to be adjusted when a
voltage-controlled machine does not run at the right speed before
synchronizing, or a tape has been recorded off pitch. This is an
advanced feature, which should generally not be used, except by
an experienced user. Please note this information is held separately for each transport, and is restored when the transport is reselected. It is NOT erased when [TRAN + CLR] is pressed. It is
only erased if a complete memory clear is performed by holding
the [CLR] key on power up. This is to allow the information to be
retained when selecting another machine.
Generator Message Hold
This allows the Lynx-2 to momentarily display generator error
messages or hold the messages until cleared by the user. The
error message will be displayed until the [CLR] key is pressed.
This is useful when the module cannot be monitored during time
code striping.
Lifters
This option allows the user to select the conditions under which
the Lynx-2 issues a Lifter Defeat command, to the local transport.
• Off - Lifters never defeated by Lynx-2. This mode prevents the
module from defeating the lifters, as it approaches the park or
cue point. This mode prevents precise tape location. Use of
the off mode usually causes slower lock-up times.
• Auto - Normal lifter operation. While in normal locate or cue
operations, the Lynx-2 will close its mute relay and issue a
Lifter Defeat command as the tape approaches its destination.
This helps the module determine a precise position, and allows
the transport to park within a 9-frame park.
• Wind - Lifter defeat mode. In this mode the Lynx-2 defeats the
lifters and engages the Mute relay during all fast-wind, cue, locate and high-speed shuttle operations, allowing high-speed
time code to be read. To allow accurate transport location, this
mode should be used whenever the tape has discontinuous or
spliced time code.
• Always - Full-time Lifter Defeat mode. In this mode the Lifter
Defeat command is active whenever the Lynx-2 is online. This
mode should be used as little as possible as the tape is always
on the head and should not be used with tape machines that
use a shared logic line to control lifter defeat and other
functions.
6-14
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Features and Controls
Locate Speed
SPD - This option allows the user to adjust the dynamic approach
speed on a given transport. This is done to accommodate unusual
conditions relating to tape pack and reel size, etc.
The default value of the Approach Speed parameter is set for
normal conditions, and is part of the pre-programmed setup information that is loaded into the synchronizer when a transport is
selected from the Transport Selection Menu. In unusual circumstances, such as very lightly loaded reels or full 14” reels, it may
be desirable to adjust the Approach Speed parameter to eliminate
any tendency to undershoot or overshoot a locate point. The
Approach Speed is displayed in arbitrary units, ranging in value
from 050 to 255.
Lock Delay
The time in frames (0-50 fr) that the machine has to be continuously in the lock window, before it is considered that the transport
is locked, and the module will show lock status. It should be noted
that very short lock delays could result in the machine locking in
the wrong place.
Lock Window
The time code window or threshold in subframes (0-75 sfr), which the
machine has to be within before the lock delay starts running. The
lock window setting can be adjusted when time-to-lock may be more
critical than lock accuracy. This can be used to fix problems with
unstable machines, bad or misframed time code or to cause a Digital
or Video tape transport to release with a looser lock tolerance. The
setting is used in conjunction with the Lock Delay setting.
Mute
This option selects the operating mode for the module’s Mute relay:
• Normal - Normal Mute relay mode. The Mute relay follows the
Lifter Defeat logic (see above). When the lifters are defeated
by the module, and tape comes into contact with the heads, the
relay will be energized.
• Until RSLV - Mute until Resolved. This mode is the same as
Normal, except that additionally the relay will stay muted in
Play, until the Resolve LED lights. The mute relay opens only
when the machine is within 25 subframes of Lock. This ensures that the audio will stay muted while the machine is
slewing into a lock condition.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
6-15
Features and Controls
•
•
•
Until Lock - Mute until Locked. This mode is the same as
Until RSLV, except that the module’s mute relay remains
closed until the LOCK LED comes on. This occurs at about
±2 subframes of offset error.
Not Lock/Stp - In this mode, the mute relay is only energized
during tape wind modes. The relay is not energized during jog
or when stopped.
If not locked - In this mode, the mute relay will energize
whenever the module is not locked, in stop or jog or shuttle
modes.
Park Ahead
The amount of frames a transport will park ahead of a locate
point. Some machines benefit from a longer, or shorter park
ahead time. Also, sometimes it may be necessary to have video
transports park exactly to the locate, or park point. In this case, a
park ahead value of ‘0’ would be selected. Except when set to ‘0’
the park ahead value is dynamically learned by the Lynx-2 to
optimize lock time.
Phase Lock
This allows control over the lock mode of the module. Phase mode
ON is the normal “resolve after lock” mode, used by the Lynx-2
module. Phase mode OFF provides for automatic resynchronization, in the event that a frame number difference of frame offset
error develops (due to a tape splice, for example). The Phase
modes are:
• Phase Mode OFF. After initial synchronization, the module
continues to observe frame number, and corrects for frame
number errors if they occur. If a frame number error (or Offset
Error) occurs, the module will resynchronize at a constant,
slow rate that should be audibly undetectable.
• Phase Mode ON (default mode). After initial synchronization,
the module reverts to a phase-lock mode and maintains resolved speed, while ignoring the actual frame numbers. This
allows the module to “free-wheel” over any discontinuities or
jumps in the time code, at the resolved speed. The Resolve
LED on the module will flash and the offset error (ERR) will
display any jump or discontinuity between the master and
slave time codes.
Pilot Out
This option selects the reference for the pilot output. It can be set
to GEN or RDR. When set to GEN the pilot output is locked to the
generator reference, when set to reader the pilot output will lock
to the time code reader input.
6-16
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Features and Controls
Sample Rate
Sample rate selection for reel-to-reel digital audio transports.
This option replaces dual 48 and 44.1 sample rate selections in the
transport setup menu. This setting is used to automatically
compensate for the tach rate frequencies at the different sample
rates.
Serial Initialization
This option will inhibit the initialization sequence normally
transmitted to a serial transport when a Lynx-2 is switched
ONLINE or when the transport itself is switched from LOCAL to
REMOTE. This means that operating parameters associated with
the color framer, tape E/E selection, servo reference, anticlog
timer, and tape timer mode will not be overridden by the Lynx-2.
Serial Tape E/E
This options menu provides three TAPE E/E modes for serial
transports using Sony protocol.
• TAPE. Always tape playback (default)
• LOCAL. Tape E/E as selected locally at the transport
• AUTO. Automatic tape E/E switching provided by the
transport.
Note:
To support Local and Auto modes, the Lynx-2 will, at the appropriate
times, issue STOP commands instead of still commands; since only a
STOP command will allow the transport to switch to E/E.
Serial TC
The serial time code option defines how machines using Sony
serial protocol will lock to serial time code. If supported by the
transport, the Lynx-2 module will request either LTC, VITC or
Tape Timer information to use as serial time code.
• OFF[TT1]. The Lynx-2 requests only tape timer information
from the serial transport. It is used as follows:
Lock to serial time code enabled: Synchronization is performed
using control track alone. The tape timer time code defines
tape position absolutely, and may be reset or preset from a
KCU.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
6-17
Features and Controls
•
•
•
Lock to serial time code disabled: Longitudinal time code via
the time code reader is used for synchronization, and the tape
timer is used for tach updating only. In this mode, the tape
timer is used in a relative sense and does not define absolute
tape position.
LTC/VITC. The Lynx-2 requests either longitudinal or VITC
time code. Arbitration between the two is performed by the
transport itself. This is the normal selection for most
transports.
LTC. The Lynx-2 requests longitudinal time code only.
VITC. The Lynx-2 requests VITC only.
A complete description of Serial Time Code features is in
Chapter 10, Advanced Features.
Serial Time Code Lock
This selection enables or disables the serial time code lock
function.
Video Park Window
The park window in frames (0-10 fr), for video and film transports
only. This is used to accurately cue a video transport to a specific
location. If the park window is set to zero, the transport will
respond to a ±1 frame locate. The video park window setting is set
for all VTRs and is not reset when a different video machine is
selected.
X-frame Generator
In normal operation, the Lynx-2 time code generator generates
time code at the selected system reference rate. The X-frame Gen
option can be used to allow the Lynx-2 generator to X-frame generate code types. Set this option to on, if it is desired to generate a
code type that is not the same as the selected Video reference or
mains frequency (i.e., to generate 25-frame code when locked to
NTSC video).
GEN Mode LEDs
Normal Mode
When none of the LEDs are lit, the generator is in normal mode.
In the normal mode, the generator begins generating continuous
time code, starting with the value entered in the generator register. The generator is locked to one of the selected generator reference sources.
6-18
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Features and Controls
Jam TC LED
When on, the Jam TC LED indicates that the generator will
automatically jam sync to the reader input after three consecutive,
valid time code frames are read. The time code read from the rear
panel TC IN jack is transferred to the generator register and becomes the current generator time code value.
If intermittent or bad time code is read while in the Jam time code
mode, the module will continue to generate continuous code until
three consecutive, valid frames of code are received. At this point,
it will re-jam.
This mode is used to regenerate code when making tape copies, or
for reconstructing code that is poorly recorded or has dropouts.
JAM UB LED
When on, the Jam UB LED indicates that the generator is generating time code, with the “user bits” portion of each time code
word being filled with the incoming time code reader value.
This mode is used when it is desired to transfer, for informational
purposes, the original time code value from a source reel onto a
new production reel.
To display the User Bits register, press the [SHIFT] and
[DSPL SEL] keys simultaneously. The letters UB are shown in
the display to indicate that the user bits are being displayed.
Press [SHIFT] and [DSPL SEL] to return to the normal time code
display.
Remember, in a normal operation, the generator will set the userbits portion of the time code to 00:00:00:00, unless another value is
intentionally entered by means of the front panel or during a
Jam UB sync operation.
TACH LED
When on, the TACH LED indicates that the generator will generate time code based on the TACH information from the machine.
The Lynx-2 will convert tach pulses into a SMPTE time code
value. Note that the actual time code value is arbitrary and can
be preset using the Lynx-2 [SET HOLD] key.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
6-19
Features and Controls
N/STD LED
There are three non-standard reference sources. These are considered non-standard because the Lynx-2 has no control over the code
speed and therefore, it may not meet time code specifications.
This LED lights if the generator reference selected deviates by
more than ±0.2% of the numerical rate.
GEN REF Key
The [GEN REF] key is used:
• When pressed it toggles through the module’s choices of
available generator reference sources.
• Pressing the [SHIFT] and [GEN REF] keys simultaneously,
toggle-activates a BandWidth Limit (BWL) filter on the reader
input.
• In setup, the [GEN REF] key accesses the AUX 1 menu. This
menu is used for setting the film processor option parameters.
Figure Chapter 6 -6. Reference Source Controls and Indicators
BWL
Press [SHIFT] + [GEN REF] to select the bandwidth limit filter.
The BWL LED will come on to indicate that a 50 kHz bandpass
filter has been inserted in the time code Reader circuit. This filter
helps eliminate spurious noise that might otherwise pollute
incoming time code.
6-20
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Features and Controls
AUX 1 Setup Menu
In setup mode, the GEN REF key accesses the AUX-1 menu. To
access the AUX-1 menu, press [SHIFT] and [MSTR] simultaneously, followed by {AUX 1}. The AUX-1 menu is available only
when a film interface option board is fitted in the Lynx-2 module.
It provides access to the following film options:
• Film frame rate
• Film acceleration
• Film fast speed
• Film input
• Film time code
To select items in the AUX-1 menu, use the {NEXT} and {LAST}
keys to scroll left and right through the menu. Use the [↑] and [↓]
arrows to set the option that corresponds with your operational
requirements.
Press [SHIFT] and [MSTR] to exit and save these selections as
part of the module’s default setup. Once selected, the Lynx-2 will
initialize to these settings each time the module is powered-up.
Table Chapter 6 -3. AUX-1 Setup Menu
KEY
MENU
SUB-MENU
RANGE
GEN REF
AUX-1
Film
FRMS/SEC
24
25
30
Film accel
4-32
Film fast spd
1-20 (limited by selected pulse rate)
Film in
BI-PHASE
TACH/DIR
Film TC
FILM
GEN
SYSTEM
Film Frame Rate
This option selects the nominal film frame rate at sync speed. It
can be set to 24, 25, or 30 frames-per-second. The selected frame
rate is indicated by the 24, 25 and 30 transport code type LED’s.
NOTE:
If NTSC video is selected as the system reference, the biphase
generator will run 0.1% slow.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
6-21
Features and Controls
Film Acceleration
This option sets the ramp or acceleration rate of the biphase generator. The acceleration values are normalized to play speed. An
acceleration value of ‘1’ means the biphase output accelerates at
1x play speed per second, with a value of ‘5’, the output will
accelerate at ‘5’ times play speed per second.
Film Fast Speed
This option sets the maximum fast wind speed of the biphase generator. The fast speed value is expressed as a multiple of play
speed; a value of ‘6’ would limit the wind speed to 6x play speed.
The maximum fast speed that can be set, is also limited by the selected biphase pulse rate.
Film Input
The film follower or biphase reader input can be set to read either
biphase or tach and direction signal inputs.
Film Time Code
This menu item allows the operator to set the time code format
used by the Lynx-2 reader, thus controlling the film cross-framing
method.
• FILM - The reader will operate and display the biphase frame
rate, as in the previous version of the Lynx-2 software (this is
the default mode). The biphase frame rate is set by the Film
FMRS/SEC Lynx-2 menu.
• GEN - The reader will use the time code format of the LTC
generator. This corresponds to the original Lynx method, and
requires the operator to preset the generator code type.
• SYSTEM - If the Lynx-2 is a slave, then the reader will
automatically follow the time code type of the master deck. If
the Lynx-2 is a master, then:
a. In a KCU system, if the Lynx-2 is also the reference
transport, then the reader time code type will be
determined by the KCU FILM menu “Ref Code Type”.
Otherwise, the reader code type will be that of the actual
reference transport.
b. In a stand-alone system, the reader will use the same time
code format as the LTC generator.
6-22
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Features and Controls
GEN REF Key LEDs
The [GEN REF] key selects the Lynx-2 generator reference source.
The generator reference source determines the speed that the generator will run at, and is used by the Master module as the system
speed reference.
INT LED
When generating time code, the INT LED indicates that the
generator is referencing the module’s INTernal crystal.
VID LED
When generating time code, the VID LED indicates that the generator is referencing an external controller, or video source, that is
plugged into one of the two EXT VID jacks on the rear panel.
If VID is selected as the GEN REF, but no video signal is present,
the VID LED will flash and a “Gen ref Err” message appears in
the display.
AUX LED
When generating time code, the AUX LED indicates that the generator is referencing a 50-60 Hz signal that is connected to the
AUX jack on the rear panel of the module. Remember, this is a
non-standard REF SRC.
MAINS LED
When generating time code, the MAINS LED indicates that the
generator is referencing the module’s AC power line as a reference
frequency. Remember, this is a non-standard REF SRC.
RDR LED
When generating time code, the RDR LED (above the [GEN REF]
key) indicates that the generator is referencing time code that is
connected to the TC IN jack on the rear panel of the module.
Remember, this is a non-standard REF SRC.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
6-23
Features and Controls
Display Controls and Indicators
Figure Chapter 6 -7. Display Controls and Indicators
DSPL SEL Key
The [DSPL SEL] key is used:
• When pressed, it toggles the main display so that the GEN,
RDR, SYNC PT, OFFSET and ERR values can be read.
• When [SHIFT] and [DSPL SEL] are pressed simultaneously,
the code user bit values are displayed.
• In setup, the [DSPL SEL] key is used to access the TRANsport
select menu.
UBITS
Press [SHIFT] and [DSPL SEL] simultaneously to display the
user-bits portion of the time code value in the display. The
following are the codes shown in the display:
UB Time code user bits displayed
TC Time code position displayed. TC is only shown when the
Lynx-2 is fitted with an option card that permits the display
to be updated from a second source (i.e., biphase).
Bi Biphase position displayed
Pr Preset displayed
TRAN Setup Menu
TRAN refers to the transport menu in the Lynx-2 setup
configuration. In setup, press the [DSPL SEL] key for access to
the TRANsport menu.
6-24
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Features and Controls
Use the [NEXT] and [LAST] keys to scroll through the alphabetic
list of transport manufacturers. Use the [↑] and [↓] arrows to
move through the supported machines. Select the machine that
you are using from this list. Press [SHIFT] and [MSTR] to exit
setup and to save this selection as part of the module’s default
setup. Once selected, it will become part of the global setup that
is loaded each time the module is powered-on.
Table Chapter 6 -4. TRAN Setup Menu
KEY
MENU
MANUFACTURER
TRANSPORT
DISPL SEL
TRAN
AEG
M-20
Akai
DR-1200
Ampex
ATR-100
ATR-124
MM1200
VPR-3
VPR-6
VPR-80
VPR-300
This is a small example of the Transport menu. The complete Transport menu can be
found in the Appendix (Cable Reference Guide).
DSPL SEL Key LEDs
There are five LEDs above the [DSPL SEL] key. These LEDs indicate which register is accessed, for the alpha-numeric display.
Figure Chapter 6 -8. Display Control and Indicator LEDs
GEN LED
When on, the GEN LED (above the [DSPL SEL] key) indicates
that the main display is showing the value in the generator register. The code type (above the [GEN CODE] key) and generator
reference LEDs indicate the reference source and code type being
generated.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
6-25
Features and Controls
RDR LED
When on, the RDR LED (above the [DSPL SEL] key) indicates the
tape transport position. The reader position can be updated by
one of several transport signal sources. When time code is being
read, the LTC LED turns on and the actual incoming time code
value appears in the display. When LTC is not present, one of
four other sources is sequentially selected to update the display.
The lowest priority is transport tach pulses, if the TACH LED
turns on, it indicates that tach pulses are being counted and used
to update the display.
SYNC PT LED
When turned on, the SYNC PT LED indicates the sync point
register value.
The sync point register value is used to automatically calculate
offsets between machines. If the sync point register is active, the
sync point LED will remain on. The [DSPL SEL] key is stepped
through the options.
OFFSET LED
When turned on, the OFFSET LED indicates the offset, if any,
between the master and slave machines.
Offset is a numerical value representing the time difference between the master and slave transport positions. It is always applied to the slave modules. The offset is subframe accurate.
Offset is determined as follows:
Slave time code 03:20:40:15
- Master time code 02:10:20:15
= Offset number
01:10:20:00
or
1hr 10min 20sec 0frames
If the slave module has an offset, the offset LED will remain on.
The [DSPL SEL] key is stepped through the display options.
ERR LED
The ERR LED (also called offset error), indicates that the display
is showing the actual position of the local machine in relation to
the master. The offset error value will count down to zero as the
slave machine synchronization. Once the slave machine is in lock,
the error value should read >L0.00.
In “search” mode, the display shows the distance to the search
point. Subframe values are not displayed in search mode.
6-26
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Features and Controls
Note
With video machines, a small subframe error may be displayed even
after the machines are locked. This is the phase error between the time
code and control track. This is not a problem if the value is constant. If
the value drifts, the machines are not locked and it is likely that the
time code generator reference source was not video when the tape was
striped.
Figure Chapter 6 -9. Display Control Keys
SET HOLD Key
The [SET HOLD] key is used to:
• If the [SET HOLD] key is pressed and held, it will hold or
momentarily “freeze” the display for two seconds. ADJUST
keys may then be used to enter offsets, sync points, generator
or reader values.
• If the [SET HOLD] key is pressed and released, the display
will hold and the SET HOLD LED will flash. The [↑], [CLR]
and
[↓] keys can then be used to enter or adjust offsets, sync points,
and generator or reader values.
• When [SET HOLD] is pressed, the “frames” column (far right
on the main display) will flash. Adjust and set the frames
value as needed. Press [SET HOLD] again and the “seconds”
column flashes. Enter the desired “seconds” value. Each successive press of the [SET HOLD] key moves the flashing
display column to the left, allowing data entry.
Once you’ve entered your values, press the [STORE] key to
save the new value to a register of your choice. To transfer a
time code value, press the [DSPL SEL] key one or more times
to select the display register you want to store in. By this
method, the Lynx-2 allows time code values to be captured and
transferred to another register. For example, a sync point
value can be transferred to the time code generator.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
6-27
Features and Controls
To release the display, without saving the changes, press and
hold the [SET HOLD] key until the SET/HOLD LED turns off
(approx. 2 seconds). The display will resume counting.
Fast Forward
Pressing the [SHIFT] and [SET HOLD] keys simultaneously, will
put the local machine in “fast forward” mode.
Next
In setup mode, the [SET HOLD] key is used as the NEXT key.
This key allows you to step to the next item in a setup menu.
Key
The [↓] (down arrow) key is used to adjust values while in the SET
HOLD mode. It subtracts ‘1’ from the number in the flashing display column. Hold the key down for continuous scrolling.
Stop
Pressing the [SHIFT] and [↓] keys simultaneously, allows you to
“stop” the local machine.
Menu
In setup mode, the [↓] is used to change option menu items.
CLR Key
The [CLR] key is used to clear the display in SET HOLD mode,
and set a value of 00:00:00:00 to clear error messages or prompts
from the display.
Play
Pressing the [SHIFT] and [CLR] keys simultaneously, will put the
local machine into “play”.
Key
The [↑] (up arrow) key is used to adjust values while in the SET
HOLD mode. It adds ‘1’ to the number in the flashing display
column. Hold the key down for continuous scrolling.
Rehearse
Pressing the [SHIFT] and [↑] keys simultaneously, will put the
local machine into rehearse. The REH LED above the [TRAN
MODE] key will light when the transport is in rehearse.
6-28
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Features and Controls
STORE Key
The [STORE] key is used:
• To store a time code value in SET HOLD mode.
• For time code and OFFSET values, one of the LEDs in the
DSPL SEL column will be lit, indicating which register the
value will be stored in. When STORE is pressed, the value in
the display is stored into the selected register, and SET HOLD
mode is canceled.
Record
Pressing the [SHIFT] and [STORE] keys simultaneously, puts the
local transport into RECord. The REC LED above the [TRAN
MODE] key will light when the local transport is in record.
Timing Setup Menu
In setup mode, the [STORE] key accesses the timing option menu.
The Timing menu is used to adjust the default Record command
advance timing. TimeLine has calculated this for each machine,
at each speed, when the Lynx-2 is under external editor control.
The record timing compensation is used when a machine is put
into record in an edit sequence. The Record command is issued,
fractionally, in advance of the edit In point, so that the machine is
fully in record at the In point. The Record advance value for each
machine is automatically set when a machine is selected from the
transport table. When the Lynx-2 is operated in SAL mode, the
record timing menu values are not used. The Timing menu also
contains the Rehearse command In and Out method, these are
also automatically set when a machine is selected from the transport table.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
6-29
Features and Controls
Table Chapter 6 -5. Timing Setup Menu
KEY
MENU
SUB-MENU
RANGE
STORE
TIMING
IN ADV High
OUT ADV High
IN ADV Med
OUT ADV Med
IN ADV Low
OUT ADV Low
0 - 255 ms
0 - 255 ms
0 - 255 ms
0 - 255 ms
0 - 255 ms
0 - 255 ms
Rehearse IN
0 - Latch REH
1 - Pulse REH
2 - Pulse REH + PLAY
3 - Pulse REH + REC IN
4 - Latch REH + REC IN
5 - Pulse REC
6 - Long Latch REH + REC IN
Rehearse OUT
0 - Unlatch REH
1 - Pulse PLAY
2 - Pulse REH
3 - Pulse PLAY + REC OUT
4 - Pulse REC
5 - Pulse REH then PLAY
The Lynx-2 module transport, record advance timing, can be
checked or adjusted by running a test edit with the selected machine. Once the test edit procedure has been performed, the settings are saved in battery backed ram. If another machine is
selected, the settings will be reset to the factory defaults.
Record timing adjustments are made in setup mode. Press the
[SHIFT] and [MSTR] keys simultaneously followed by the
{TIMING} key to enter the timing setup menu. Use the {LAST}
and {NEXT} keys to step to the transport speed setting that you
want to adjust. The values indicated in the display correspond to
the delay in milliseconds, between the Lynx-2 module record command being issued and the transport actually going into record.
In an ATR, this delay is composed of a number of components,
which include erase/record head spacing, record bias ramp timing
and transport control microprocessor command scanning rate.
There are separate settings for record in and record out at each
transport speed. If the delay is known, use the [↑] and [↓] keys to
adjust the timing at the selected speed. The Lynx-2 module will
then issue the Record In and Out commands this amount ahead of
real time so that the resultant on tape edit will be correct.
If the record delays are not known, use the following procedure to
adjust the In and Out timing. While performing the test edits,
make sure the ATR is set to “Sync-Repro” or “Sel-Sync”.
6-30
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Features and Controls
The procedure uses a video tape transport as an accurate edit
timing source to make comparative edits on the ATR. Set up the
VTR as the record deck, load a scratch tape with prerecorded time
code and audio material, or record time code and a 1 kHz tone on
tape. Set up a 20 second duration edit with an in point at an even
numbered time, for example 2:00:00. Perform the edit to black:
this will leave the VTR audio track signal ending at 2:00:00 and
restarting at 2:20:00 precisely.
Make the ATR the record deck and the VTR a source deck. To
adjust the record in timing, perform an edit with a 10 second duration and the same in point for both machines as used in the
previous edit. Replay the audio machine and listen for the VTR
audio. Adjust the Lynx-2 record in timing value until the VTR
audio is just heard in the ATR edit. Start by making coarse adjustments (25 ms steps) to bring the test edit point into the proper
timing range and then fine tune the value until it is satisfactory.
Repeat for each tape speed.
Figure Chapter 6 -10. Record In/Out Timing
To adjust the record out timing, set up a 10 second edit with the
edit out point for both machines at 2:20:00. Perform the edit and
replay the audio machine, and listen for the VTR audio. Adjust
the Lynx-2 record out timing value until the VTR audio is just
heard in the ATR edit. Repeat for each tape speed.
After each trial ATR edit, it is recommended that the audio on the
ATR machine is manually erased, so that each test edit is performed on blank audio tape. Consideration should be given, to the
fact that the ATR’s microprocessor command scan times may vary,
and there could be a slight variance in record timing from one edit
to the next.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
6-31
Features and Controls
Transport Controls and Indicators
TRAN Mode Key
The [TRAN MODE] key is used to put the module on and offline.
When online, the transport is under Lynx-2 control. When offline,
the transport is released from Lynx-2 control.
Resolve
Press [SHIFT] and [TRAN MODE] simultaneously to select
resolve mode. This mode is reserved for future implementation.
Menu
In setup, the [TRAN MODE] key is used as the menu key. Pressing the menu key sequentially steps through the setup option
menus. The menu key is useful to quickly scan the menu structure if you can’t remember which menu you need.
Reader Source LEDs
The LEDs on the left of the module, under the Transport heading,
are “Reader” indicators. The Reader status LEDs are active regardless of other information being displayed on the front panel.
Figure Chapter 6 -11. Transport Controls and Indicators
LTC LED
When lit, the LTC LED indicates that either valid Longitudinal
Time Code (LTC) is present a the modules TC IN jack, or
Interpolated Serial Longitudinal Time Code is being updated from
the machine’s serial port. In this case, the SER LED will also
light indicating valid Serial LTC.
VITC LED
The VITC LED will light when Serial Vertical Interval Time Code
is being updated from the machine’s serial port. The SER LED
will also light indicating valid Serial VITC.
6-32
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Features and Controls
SER LED
When lit, the SER LED indicates that valid serial time code is being read from the machine’s serial port. Either the LTC or VITC
LED will also light, indicating the type of serial time code
detecred. This feature is only available with serial VTRs that are
fitted with an address track time code reader.
PILOT LED
When lit, the Pilot LED indicates that Pilot Tone is present at the
module’s PILOT IN jack, and that the synchronizer is using the
pilot signal to lock or resolve the transport. If the transport feeds
both time code and Pilot Tone to the module, the module will
automatically switch to reading the Pilot if valid time code is lost.
TACH LED
When lit, the TACH LED (above the [SHIFT] key) indicates that
transport tach pulses are being used to update the reader position.
This LED will also light under two other circumstances: If a
Lynx-2 Film Module detects valid biphase and when the module is
using serial control tach pulses alone to synchronize the transport.
The transport reader LED display can be summarize by the
following table.
Table Chapter 6 -6. LED Status
LED’s
Time Code Source
LTC
VITC
SER
PILOT
TACH
LTC via reader
X
--
--
--
--
Pilot Tone
--
--
--
X
--
Tach Update
--
--
--
--
X
Biphase
--
--
--
--
X
Serial LTC
X
--
X
--
--
Serial VITC
--
X
X
--
--
Serial Tape Timer 1
--
--
X
--
X
Interpolated Serial LTC
X
--
X
--
X
Interpolated Serial VITC
--
X
X
--
X
Note:
“Interpolated” indicates that the time code is being updated from control
track pulses by the transport itself.
X indicates that the LED is “On”.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
6-33
Features and Controls
Transport Status LEDs
Above the [TRAN MODE] key there are five LEDs that provide
transport status information.
ONLINE LED
When the ONLINE LED is lit, the Lynx-2 module will respond to
system commands and take control of the transport’s capstan
servo to synchronize the machine.
When the ONLINE LED is not lit, the Lynx-2 module relinquishes
control of the transport’s capstan speed. The SYNC POINT key
and shifted function transport control keys can still be used to locate and control the machine.
REC LED
The RECord LED is a tally indicator. When the REC LED is on,
the local transport is in record.
REH LED
The REHearsal LED is a tally indicator. When the REH LED is
on, the local transport is in rehearse. Rehearse is used in editing
when an edit sequence is checked prior to going into record.
LOCK LED
When the LOCK LED is on, the transport is in “play” and its time
code is synchronized with the master reference. The machine is
locked and in sync.
The LOCK condition is also displayed by the letter “L”, in the offset err (ERR) display. The LOCK LED has an approximately one
second delay, while the system determines the stability of the lock
status.
When the Lynx-2 is controlling a VTR or DAT machine, the transport is brought into lock by the synchronizer, then released to its
own internal servo reference. When the transport is released to
its own servo reference, it may reframe. The LOCK and
RESOLVE LEDs will stay lit as long as the machine does not lose
LOCK, and stays within 25 subframes of the correct position.
RESOLVE LED
When lit, the RESOLVE LED indicates that the transport is in
“play” and that its’ time code is resolved to within 25 subframes
(25/100 frame) of the master’s reference source.
6-34
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Features and Controls
SYNC POINT Key
The [SYNC POINT] key is used to:
• Cue a transport to the current sync point. This feature only operates when the local transport is offline (ONLINE LED is off).
• Pressing the [SHIFT] and [SYNC POINT] keys
simultaneously, will put the transport into “rewind”.
• In setup, the [SYNC POINT] key is used as the LAST key. The
LAST key allows you to step back to the previous item in a
setup menu.
Transport Code Type LEDs (30, DF, 25, 24)
The four LEDs under the Transport heading indicate the code type
connected to the reader input. These are simply Reader status
lights. One LED will always be on solid to indicate the off-tape
code type. If this code type is not the same as the Master
reference, then a code type LED will flash to indicate the type of
the Master. The Lynx-2 will synchronize the dissimilar code types.
See Advanced Features for information on X-frame
synchronization.
Miscellaneous LEDs
There are several LEDs on the Lynx-2 module that are simple
status lights. The user has little or no control over these LEDs.
They are:
• When on, the RMT LED indicates the Remote/Local select
status on serially controlled machines that support this feature. If this LED flashes, it indicates that the machine is set
to local control.
• When on, the BWL LED indicates that the bandwidth limit
function has been selected.
• When on, the VARI LED indicates that the transport is in
varispeed synchronization mode. A KCU fitted with K600
series software must be used for varispeed operation.
• When on, the H,M,L SPEED LEDs indicate the nominal tape
speed of the local transport (i.e., 30/15/7 1/2 ips).
• When on, the FILM and VITC LEDs indicate the presence of
either the FILM or VITC option cards.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
6-35
Features and Controls
Bulkhead Features
The removable Lynx-2 front panel provides access to a number of
Lynx-2 features.
• Module software prom
• Module serial number
• Generator code output level adjustment
• Reader reshaped time code output adjustment
• Pilot output level adjustment
• Chassis ground isolate jumper
• System test points
• System operation confidence LEDs
Figure Chapter 6 -12. Bulkhead Features
The nominal setting for the output level adjustments is -8 VU.
The adjustment pots have a range of from zero to +10 dBm.
A chassis ground isolation jumper is provided. This jumper allows
the user to choose between having the signal and chassis grounds
connected or separated.
The video and communications grounds are always isolated.
Other jumpers and test points include:
• Optional interface card jumpers
• Software program jumpers
• Test points.
The Lynx-2 system software can be updated by change the PROM
(U50) immediately behind the front panel bulkhead cut out.
Please refer to PROM Installation Guide (Part Number 73625)
when installing new Lynx-2 software.
The Lynx-2 Serial Number is located on the bulkhead label. This
number is required for all communications with the factory.
Two system “OK” confidence LEDs are provided. Both of these
LED’s should be on, in normal operation.
6-36
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Features and Controls
Rear Panel
Figure Chapter 6 -13. Rear Panel
This section identifies each connector and jack on the rear panel of
the Lynx-2 Time Code Module, and describes its function in detail.
AC Power Cord Connector
The AC power cord connector is a molded socket that accepts an
international standard 3-pin IEC cord.
The power cord connector accepts the factory-supplied IEC power
cord.
The Lynx-2 power supply has an internal fuse that is at a correct
ratio for the module. Should this fuse fail, it is likely that the
power supply unit will have to be replaced. Please refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
RESHAPE
RESHAPE is a squared-up output of the Reader input. This is an
electronically balanced, female 1/4” TRS phone jack.
A RESHAPE level potentiometer is located behind the removable
front panel. Use this pot to adjust the output level of the reshaped
time code, as needed.
GEN OUT
GEN OUT is the time code generator output jack. This is an electronically balanced, female, 1/4” TRS phone jack. It provides generator time code when the generator is on.
A GEN OUT level potentiometer is located behind the removable
front panel. Use this pot to adjust the output level of the generator, as needed.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
6-37
Features and Controls
PILOT IN
PILOT IN accepts Pilot Tone input. This is a differential input,
female, 1/4” TRS phone jack. Pilot Tone is used by the synchronizer to resolve transport speed to the generator reference speed
source.
PILOT OUT
PILOT OUT is a dedicated Pilot output. This is an electronically
balanced, female, 1/4” TRS phone jack. The pilot output is software
selectable to follow either generator reference or reader input.
It provides a 60, 59.94, 50 or 48 Hz sinusoidal wave that is locked
to the generator reference or time code input. The frequency of
this signal is always twice the frame rate of the reference. Pilot
Tone output is always present, provided that the generator reference or reader signals are present.
A Pilot out level potentiometer is located behind the removable
front panel. Use this pot to adjust the output level of the Pilot
Tone as needed.
AUX
The AUX port uses a standard 15-pin, “D” connector. It can be
used to access the external “lock-status” output, or as the mute
relay. It is also used as an expansion serial port for connecting a
remote front panel to the Lynx-2. See the Installation Section for
the connector pin-out description.
EXT VIDEO
Two EXT VIDEO, female BNC connectors are provided. Either
may be used to provide a reference signal for the generator and
synchronizer. The BNCs are hard-wired together in parallel, so
that the unused plug becomes an extension. Use the second connector to loop video through the Lynx-2, or terminate the video
input by attaching a 75 ohm terminating plug.
VITC
A VITC jack is provided so that the Lynx-2 module can read VITC.
To read VITC, the VITC option card must be installed.
6-38
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Features and Controls
MAC
This is a standard Macintosh computer DIN-8, mini-circular connector, configured for direct connection to an Apple MACintosh
computer printer or modem port. The serial port is RS422 and is
available for future development. This port is currently used to
output MTC (MIDI time code), which can be used to interface to
other MIDI applications.
TC IN
TC IN is the Time Code Input Connector. This is a differential input, female, 1/4” TRS phone jack. This jack is used as the input
for the time code reader. Attach the output of the machines time
code track to this jack.
TRANSPORT
TRANSPORT is a 50-pin, “D” style connector used to interface to
each transport with factory-supplied transport interface cables.
See the Installation Section, for the connector pin-out.
RS422
Two, standard 9-pin, female, RS422 connectors are provided.
These are used to connect a Lynx-2 module to other Lynx-2 modules, or to an external controller or editor. All Lynx-2 modules in
a system must be joined together using standard RS422 cables.
The RS422 connectors are wired in parallel. Use the second
connector to loop through or daisy-chain to the next module.
Ground Isolation
There are two Ground/ISO jumpers behind the removable front
panel. These allow you to isolate the signal and chassis grounds
as needed.
• In the GND position, the signal and chassis grounds are tied
together.
• In the ISO position the signal and chassis grounds are
electrically isolated.
WARNING
The EXT VID and RS422 connectors share the same ground, and are always ground isolated
from both transport AND chassis ground. This means there may be a ground potential
between the video BNC and the transport cables. See the Troubleshooting Section, for further
information on correcting ground loop problems.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
6-39
Features and Controls
6-40
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Chapter 7 Time Code Generator
Introduction
Figure Chapter 7 -1. Lynx-2 as a Generator
The Lynx-2 generates all worldwide standard SMPTE/EBU time
codes. MIDI Time Code (MTC), Pilot Tone and 24-frame film code
can also be generated.
SMPTE/EBU, MTC, and the 24-frame rate contain both address
and speed information. Pilot Tone provides speed information
only.
It is important to understand how the speed of the time code generator is derived, since the user always has to select and use a
specific generator speed and time code type; it is a significant part
of using the Lynx-2 module.
NOTE
Understanding the subtleties of time code terminology can make a
significant difference in a clear and accurate understanding of the
Lynx-2 Time Code Module. Before continuing, you may wish to refer to
the Appendix. There you will find a glossary of time code terminology.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
7-1
Time Code Generator
Time Code Generators produce a digitally coded signal, governed
by a stable reference source. The Lynx-2 generator outputs code
that is locked to one of five generator speed reference sources.
These GEN REFS are mutually exclusive, meaning that only one
may be selected at a time. The five sources are:
INT - Internal crystal
VID - External video sync
AUX - External Pilot Tone
MAINS - AC line supply
RDR - Time code reader input
On the front panel of the Lynx-2, the [GEN REF] key is used to access the five source references. INT and MAINS are internally
derived and VID, AUX and RDR are all from external sources.
INT
When the modules generator reference is selected to internal, the
time code generator is referencing the modules internal crystal.
The generator can generate any code selected in the generator
code type column.
VID
When the module's generator reference is selected to video, the
time code generator is referencing an EXTernal video sync signal,
which has been connected to the EXT VID connector on the rear
panel of the module.
If the video source connected is NTSC, the time code generator
will run at 29.97 fps. The code selected in the code type column
can be either non-drop (30 frame) or drop frame only. If the video
source connected is PAL, the time code generator will run at 25 fps
and the code type is preset to 25 frame. The Gen Ref VID LED
will flash and a "GEN LOCK ERR" message is displayed, if the
module loses video. The error message is maintained in the display as a warning, until [CLR] is pressed.
AUX
When the module's generator reference is selected to AUX, the
time code generator is referencing an AUXiliary or PILOT signal,
which has been connected to the AUX connector on the rear panel
of the module.
7-2
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Time Code Generator
Note
This is a non-standard reference source. Lynx-2 has no control over the
code speed and therefore, the code may not meet time code
specifications. The generator N/STD (non-standard) LED will light as a
warning if the reference rate deviates by greater than ±0.2% of nominal
speed.
The AUX input speed tracking range is limited between 50 Hz
-15% and 60 Hz +15%. The generator non-standard LED will light
if the reference rate deviates by more than ±0.2% of nominal
speed. The generator can generate any code selected in the generator code type column. The Gen Ref AUX LED will flash if the
AUX reference is not present, loses lock or is out of range.
MAINS
When the module's generator reference is selected to MAINS, the
time code generator is referencing the module's internal MAINS
AC power line frequency.
If the AC power line is 60 cycles, the code selected in the code type
column can be either non-drop (30 frame) or drop frame only. If
the AC power line is 50 cycles, the code type is automatically preset to 25 frame.
RDR
When the module's generator reference is selected to reader, the
time code generator is referencing incoming time code from an external machine.
The generator will reference and track the incoming time code
rate. If the incoming code type is 30 frame (non-drop), the generator can generate either 30 frame or drop frame code. If the incoming code is DF, the generator can generate either 30 frame (nondrop) or drop frame. This can be used to convert between drop
and non-drop code types. The Gen Ref RDR LED will flash if the
reader reference is not present.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
7-3
Time Code Generator
Setting the Generator Reference
The [GEN REF] key allows you to select a generator reference
source. The generator must be off, to select or change the reference source. If the [GEN REF] key is pressed while the generator
is running a "Generator ON" message will be displayed.
To set or change the generator reference:
1. If the generator is running, press the [GEN ON] key to turn
the generator off. This key toggles ON and OFF.
2. Press the [GEN REF] key until the LED next to the desired
generator reference comes on.
3. Press the [GEN ON] key to start the generator. It will
generate code locked to the reference source.
Once the reference source has been selected, the speed or rate of
the time code is automatically defined by the reference source
(REF SRC). The nominal speeds are 30, 29.97, 25 and 24. When
the reference source selected is either AUX or RDR, the Lynx-2
modules have a varispeed range of ± 15%, relative to each of the
four nominal speeds.
Selecting the Generator Code Type
The next step is to select the "code type" to be generated. Selecting the correct code type is possibly the most critical decision that
is made when operating any time code module. (More complete information on SMPTE time code can be found in the Appendix.
Please read this section if you have any doubts about time code in
general, reference speed, frame rates, or time code types.)
If you have selected INT as the reference source, then you may
choose any code type, i.e., 30, DF, 25 or 24.
When SMPTE is selected you can also choose the reference rate to
be 29.97 or 30 fps. If your reference source is VID, your choices
are 30 and DF for NTSC, and 25 for PAL.
If your reference source is AUX, you may choose any code type,
i.e., 30, DF, 25 or 24. But please remember, AUX is a nonstandard reference source.
If your reference source is MAINS, the code type is determined by
the line frequency.
If your reference source is RDR, the code type can be mixed DF
and non-DF for SMPTE, but can only be the same as the incoming
time code for 25 and 24.
7-4
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Time Code Generator
29.97 LED
When the 29.97 LED is on, it indicates that the time code being
generated is running at a speed of 29.97 fps. This is the NTSC
color speed reference and the NTSC color standard.
At the same time that the 29.97 LED is lit, either the DF LED or
30 LED will be lit. If the DF LED is lit, this indicates that the
generator's speed is 29.97 and the code type is DF. This is the
common broadcast format, and will cause the Lynx-2's display and
a stopwatch to match over a given elapsed time.
If the 30 LED is lit, this indicates that the generator's speed is
29.97 and the code type is 30 frame or non-drop frame. This is the
standard configuration for music recording. In this format, the
Lynx-2 time code display will run 0.1% slower than real time.
When the module is referenced to NTSC video, and the generator
selected to 24- or 25-frame code, the 29.97 LED will flash to
indicate that the 24 or 25 cross frame code being generated is
running 0.1% slow.
30 LED
When the 30 LED alone is on, it indicates that the time code being
generated is running at a speed of 30 fps. This is the old B&W TV
standard.
This indicates that the code type is 30 frame or non-drop frame.
This configuration will cause the Lynx-2's display and a stopwatch
to match elapsed times.
DF LED
When the DF LED is on, it indicates that the generator's speed is
30 and the code type is DF. This is a non-standard format, and
the Lynx-2 time code display will run 0.1% faster than real time.
The DF LED indicates that the time code being generated is a
SMPTE "drop frame" code type.
Both 30 and 29.97 fps speeds can operate with the DF code type.
DF is a non-linear counting system that "drops" certain numbers
every hour, so that the time code module's display and the actual
elapsed time when running at 29.97 fps will match. A total of 108
frames are dropped during each hour of program time, allowing
the time code display to catch up to the actual elapsed time.
This LED does not indicate whether the time code rate is 30 fps or
29.97 fps. That indication is provided by the 29.97 LEDs.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
7-5
Time Code Generator
25 LED
When the 25 LED is on, it indicates that the time code being generated is running at a speed of 25 fps and the code type is 25.
(Remember, the European reference is 50 Hz.) This is the EBU
color and B&W television standard, also know as the PAL format.
The DF LED can never be lit when time code is generated at this
speed. This speed and code type will produce 24 hours of time
code over 24 hours of elapsed time.
24 LED
When the 24 LED is lit, it indicates that the time code being generated is running at a speed of 24 fps and the code type is 24. This
is the standard film/frame rate.
The DF LED can never be lit when time code is generated at this
speed. This speed and code type will produce 24 hours of time
code over 24 hours of elapsed time.
Generator Modes
Lynx-2 has four generator modes. One normal mode and three alternate modes. The indicators for the alternate modes are aligned
in a column above the [GEN ON] key. They are Jam time code,
Jam UB, and TACH. There is also a non-standard indicator that
is lit when the generator reference is not running at nominal
speed.
The [GEN ON] key, in conjunction with the [SHIFT] key, is used
to select the various generator modes. In normal operation, no
LEDs are lit in the [GEN ON] column. If you press and hold the
[SHIFT] key while pressing the [GEN ON] key, you can toggle
through the alternate modes. The generator must be off before the
generator mode can be changed.
Normal
In the Normal mode, none of the LEDs above the [GEN ON] key
are lit.
The Normal mode is automatically selected at power on. In this
mode, the generator runs sequentially from the starting value
stored in the generator register. The generator register is the
module's memory buffer that holds the generator time code value.
7-6
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Time Code Generator
This value can be preset by using the Lynx-2's capture or set hold
entry procedure. The Lynx-2 also has a generator preset register.
The generator can be repeatedly preset to this known value, by
pressing the [SHIFT] and [GEN CODE] keys when the generator
is off. The generator preset can be entered using the Lynx-2
Set/Hold procedure.
Press the [DISP SEL] key until the generator LED is lit, then
press [SHIFT] and [DSPL SEL] until the preset "Pr" is displayed.
Use the Set/Hold/Store procedure to alter the time code value. To
view the generator time code number, press [DSPL SEL] one or
more times until the display GEN LED is lit.
The most common applications use the normal mode. A typical application will be laying down or striping fresh time code onto tape.
Jam Time Code
The Lynx-2 generator will automatically Jam to the longitudinal
or serial time code reader when the Jam time code mode is
selected. All code types, including MTC (MIDI time code) can be
generated in the Jam time code mode.
Jam Sync is primarily used for:
• Reshaping or restriping existing code
• Inserting information into the user bits
• Assigning multiple generators to the same starting address
• In editing.
Figure Chapter 7 -2. Jam Sync Time Code
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
7-7
Time Code Generator
Jam time code or Jam sync is a generator function that is an alternative to reshaping. It is used to create a new time code that is
phase related to an existing time code on tape. It is extremely
useful for repairing problems in an existing time code track or
creating a continuous time code track from an edited time code
track.
The output of the generator operates as in the 'normal' generator
mode. However, the reader time code input is transferred or
jammed to the generator, which starts generating from this point
forward. Any deterioration’s or discontinuities in the source time
code are ignored, and the generator will continue to output uninterrupted code. At the point that the reader time code is transferred to the generator, the Lynx-2 displays a --Jam-- message.
JAM UB (Automatic)
The Jam UB LED is lit when Jam User Bit mode is selected. Jam
UB is used to jam time code data into the user bits, without altering normal time code generator operations. It is identical to the
Jam time code mode, except that the reader value is made to load
automatically into the generator user bits register.
In the Jam UB mode, if the time code input stops, the generator
will continue to output continuous code as described in the Jam
time code mode.
Note
We do not recommend using the automatic jam mode with video
machines as a reference source. If the incoming time code was not
correctly recorded, or if it is not framed correctly, it is possible to
generate faulty code.
7-8
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Time Code Generator
Jam TACH
When lit, indicates the module's time code generator is in Tach-totime code jam mode.
To select generator jam to Tach-mode press [SHIFT] and the
[GEN MODE] key until the generator TACH LED comes on.
Enable the generator by pressing the [GEN ON] key, the
generator output will follow the transport motion:
When the generator is enabled in the Tach-Jam mode, the machine's
motion automatically initiates time code generation. When the machine stops, the generator repeats the last frame number in the
stopped position for one second, then automatically switches off.
The generator ON LED will flash to indicate the generator is on but
is not currently generating code. When motion restarts the generator will automatically restart and jam to the incoming tach signal.
In the Tach-to-Time code mode, the default frame rate for the
module's generator is determined by the system frame rate. This
default may, of course, be overridden by the operator at any time
as long as the generator is not running.
The Tach-to-Time code mode always generates time code words at
the same bit rate as normal sync speed time code (e.g., 30 framesper-second X 80 bits-per-frame = 2400 bits-per-second), regardless
of the actual running speed of the machine, to allow reading by
devices that cannot read high speed time code.
Whenever the machine is moving, but not running in lock, the
module's generator performs a "flying jam" to the current position
on a frame-by-frame basis so that each time code frame number
generated corresponds to the instantaneous position of the machine at the start of the time code word. As a consequence, time
code numbers will not be sequential when the machine is not in
play speed lock. Frame numbers will be skipped if the machine is
running faster than play speed, and will be repeated when the machine is running slower than play speed.
When the transport achieves lock, the generator performs a single
Jam Sync operation and then continues to generate normal, sequential time code that is locked to the reader input.
The individual time code words generated by the Lynx-2 Module
are always generated in the normal, forward sequence (bit #1 to
bit #80) regardless of the tape direction. If the machine is moving
in the reverse direction, the module generates normal time code
words, which are in reverse numerical order.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
7-9
Time Code Generator
Striping Time Code
For most applications, it is preferable to stripe time code onto tape,
before recording. When time code is prestriped, you can sync the
master tape to other equipment, facilitating the recording process.
For time code generation, first select a reference source. The reference source is the generator time base signal that the time code,
synchronizer, generator, and tape machines will all sync to.
If INT (internal crystal) is selected, next select the time code type
(30, DF, 25, 24), which will depend on the application. Remember
that 30 and DF codes can run at 29.97 or 30 fps.
Enter and store an initial time code number into the generator
register. When the [GEN ON] key is pressed, Lynx-2 automatically starts with the value in the register and continues
generating time code from that point on.
Procedure to Stripe Time Code
When striping time code, the Lynx-2 should always be offline, so
the machine that the code is being recorded on, will run at its own
internal fixed speed.
This setup prevents the Lynx-2 and the record transport from getting into a capstan-control feedback loop. In other words, the record transport will not try to synchronize to itself while striping
new time code.
The following steps should be taken when striping time code:
1. The capstan speed reference of the record transport should be
set to internal. The transport mode [TRAN MODE] of the
Lynx-2 must be set offline. If the ONLINE LED is lit, press
the [TRAN MODE] key to take the machine off line.
2. Connect the GENOUT jack on the back panel of the Lynx-2 to
the input of one of the edge tracks of the record transport.
Typically the TC IN and transport cables should be connected
also.
3. Select a generator reference by pressing the [GEN REF] key
one or more times to select the desired reference source.
4. Select the code type that you want to generate by pressing the
[GEN CODE] key until the desired code type LED(s) is lit.
5. Press the [GEN ON] key to start the generator. Check to see
that the transport input is receiving a proper level. Master
tapes are generally printed at -6VU. The range of Lynx-2
output levels is -20 dBm to +6 dBm. The Lynx-2 generator
output level can be adjusted by removing the front panel and
adjusting the generator trim pot.
7-10
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Time Code Generator
6. Press the [DSPL SEL] key one or more times to select the generator to the display. Press [GEN ON] to stop the generator.
7. Press the [SET HOLD] key. The LED should now be flashing.
If desired, preload a starting time code value. The [↑] or [↓] arrows increment or decrement the values in the generator register. Pressing the [SET HOLD] key again will allow you to
move cursor-style through the HH:MM:SS:FF display.
Preloading a starting value larger than 00:00:00:00 will help
prevent rewinding the tape off the reel. 01:00:00:00 (one hour)
is a common starting value. Press [STORE] to store the value
in the generator.
8. If all the above steps have been followed, you are now ready to
record time code on tape. Press record and play on the
transport.
9. Press the [GEN ON] key to start normal time code generation.
The selected time code will be output at the GENOUT jack and
recorded onto the tape.
Restriping Time Code
The Lynx-2 module has both manual and automatic Jam Sync
modes. The process of Jam sync takes the time code value in the
reader register and transfers it to the generator register, which
can then be recorded onto tape. The Lynx-2 continues to generate
time code from the initialization point that is in-sync with the
source time code.
Pilot
The Pilot output signal is a sinusoidally-shaped output, which is
two times the frame rate of the time code that is being generated.
This signal appears at the PILOT OUT connector on the rear
panel of the Lynx-2 and is available whenever a valid generator
reference is present. If you need a Pilot Tone reference on tape, it
can be recorded on a separate track at the same time that time
code is being recorded.
When Lynx-2 is reading time code, and the time code track has a
dropout, is damaged or unusable, a Pilot track provides a way for
the time code module to maintain synchronization. When this occurs, the Lynx-2 uses the Pilot signal as a synchronizing reference.
The pilot output is normally derived from the generator reference,
if required, the pilot signal can be derived from the Reader input.
Use the pilot out option menu to select generator or reader as the
pilot reference source.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
7-11
Time Code Generator
To use Pilot signal, simply connect a TRS jack cable between the
PILOT OUT jack on the Lynx-2 and an audio input on the
transport.
A Pilot-level potentiometer is located behind the removable front
panel. Use this pot to adjust the output level of the Pilot Tone as
needed.
7-12
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Chapter 8 Time Code Reader
Introduction
Figure Chapter 8 -1. Time Code Reader: Controls and Indicators
This chapter contains information on the longitudinal and serial
time code readers of the Lynx-2. Part one describes the operations
of the longitudinal reader of the Lynx-2. Part 2 describes the
serial time code reader features of the Lynx-2.
Each Lynx-2 module contains a wideband Time Code Reader. The
Reader input (TC IN) is differential and will read all SMPTE/EBU
code formats as well as 24-frame "film" code, running at 1/10 to
60x play speeds. The Reader is an integral part of the Lynx-2
synchronizer.
The Reader accepts time code from an external tape source and
sends code information to the synchronizer through an internal
data bus; so that the machine's speed and position are constantly
updated. (Synchronizer details are covered in the Sync & Resolver
Section.)
The Lynx-2 Reader accepts incoming information from one of five
sources:
• LTC (Longitudinal Time Code)
• VITC (Vertical Interval Time Code)
• SER (Serial Time Code)
• Pilot (Pilot Tone)
• TACH (Machine Tach Pulses)
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
8-1
Time Code Readers
Time code is read from the first valid source that the Lynx-2 finds.
The Reader looks first to LTC, then VITC and so on, through to
TACH. This sequence is based on a priority detection scheme,
which is resident in the module's system software. For example, if
a machine is connected to both LTC and Pilot, and valid signals
for both are present, the Reader will automatically choose LTC as
the preferred code.
Longitudinal Time Code Reader
Reader Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wideband, bi-directional operation, with 1/10 to 60x play
speed.
Automatic detection of code-type, over a wide range of input
levels.
Code-type LED indicators.
LED indicators showing valid LTC, VITC and SERial time
code, as well as Pilot Tone and TACH pulses.
User bits display.
Automatic display of subframe offset errors in the ERR mode.
Selectable bandwidth filter for the Reader.
Reader display "hold" function.
Reshaped time code and Pilot Tone output derived from the
Reader.
Numeric Reader Display
The Time Code Reader decodes information continuously, and
updates the display at the end of each 80-bit time code word. The
code frame has to be transmitted fully, before the Reader is able to
display the address it is reading. The Lynx-2 Reader
automatically adds one frame-count to each address, so the
display indicates the current address.
To access the Reader's numeric display, press the [DSPL SEL] key
until the RDR LED comes on. When lit, the RDR LED indicates
that the Lynx-2 is reading and displaying time code, Pilot Tone or
TACH pulses.
8-2
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Time Code Readers
Display User Bits
Time code user bits can be displayed by pressing the [SHIFT] and
[DSPL SEL] keys simultaneously. This switches the numeric
display to show the user bit data. The two left hand display
characters show [UB], indicating that user bits are being
displayed. To switch back to normal time code display, press
[SHIFT] and [DSPL SEL] again.
Reader Source and Code-Type Indicators
Figure Chapter 8 -2. Reader Source and Code-Type Indicators
The column of LEDs above the [SHIFT] key indicate the source of
the information that is being used to update the Reader. The two
columns of LEDs on the left of the module, under the Transport
heading, are Reader indicators. The Reader status LEDs are
always active, regardless of other information being displayed on
the front panel.
When time code is read, the Reader automatically determines the
code type and turns on one of the code-type LEDs (30, DF, 25, 24),
on the left side of the main display. The actual incoming time
code value appears in the display.
When the module is used as a synchronizer, the code/time in the
RDR display always comes from the modules local transport.
Code Type Indicator Combinations
If a Lynx-2 module is operated in cross frame (X-frame) lock, then
two of the Reader code type LEDs will illuminate. The solid LED
always indicates the code type that is being displayed in the
numeric display. If the code type displayed is different from the
reference machine code type, a second transport code type LED
flashes indicating that the synchronizer is X-frame locking to the
system. (See the Advanced Features Section.)
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
8-3
Time Code Readers
LTC LED
When lit, the LTC LED indicates that valid Longitudinal Time
Code (LTC) is present at the module's TC IN jack.
LTC time code information is typically recorded as an analog
audio signal on a designated ATR or VTR track.
VITC LED
SMPTE/EBU code is difficult to read at slow tape speeds, and
impossible to read in "still-" or "freeze-frame". As video technology
developed, it became necessary to develop an alternative to LTC
that could be used in slow motion and freeze-frame applications.
VITC (Vertical Interval Time Code) was developed as an
alternative to LTC, when slow speed applications are required.
VITC is recorded on a pair of horizontal lines, in the vertical
blanking interval, of the video field scan. Unlike SMPTE, VITC is
reproduced in the "forward" direction only, even during reverse
tape motions. The VITC LED above the [SHIFT] key indicates
that VITC is present at the module’s transport connector and is
being used to update the Reader position. This is typically at
speeds below 1/3 play speed for jog, shuttle and freeze frame
operations.
SER LED
When a Lynx-2 is plugged into a serially controlled video machine
that can supply time code information through the serial port, the
module can use this information directly in slow motion and freeze
frame modes. The module reads serial time code from the
machine's control port, which is used to update the Reader tape
position.
When lit, the SER LED indicates that valid time code is present at
the module's transport connector and is being used to update the
Reader position.
PILOT LED
Pilot is a sinusoidally-shaped signal with a frequency of two times
the frame rate of its corresponding time code reference.
When lit, the Pilot LED indicates that Pilot Tone is present at the
module's rear panel PILOT IN jack, and that the Reader has
switched over to this signal as its source. The Reader did not find
valid LTC, VITC or serial time code.
8-4
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Time Code Readers
Pilot is typically used as a backup for LTC. Thus, if the
SMPTE/EBU code is invalid, and pilot tone is present,
synchronization will be maintained.
Pilot Tone can also be used as a speed reference when generating
fresh time code. Pilot can be used as a generator reference when
generating fresh code because of its direct 2x relationship with
SMPTE/EBU time code. For every two complete cycles of Pilot
Tone, the frame number is advanced by one.
Remember, the frequency of the Pilot Tone is always twice that of
the frame rate.
TACH LED
When lit, the TACH LED indicates that the Reader is being
updated by transport tach pulses. Tach pulses are normally
directly generated from one of the rollers in a machine's tape path,
and is therefore a measure of the amount of tape that has passed
the heads. The pulses generated, and the machine's direction tally
signal, can be used to indicate any movement in the position of the
tape. The Lynx-2 module receives this information from the
machine's transport connection and uses it to update the Reader
position, in the absence of any other signal.
If the time code on a tape becomes unreadable, Lynx-2
automatically looks for the next best time code source. The
module will search for the next best source in the following
sequence:
1. LTC
2. VITC
3. SER
4. PILOT
5. TACH
As you can see, TACH is the lowest source recognized by Lynx-2.
When reading TACH, the Lynx-2 uses a value stored in the
machine lock-up table to calculate the number of tach pulses that
relate to each frame of time code, and increments the display
accordingly.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
8-5
Time Code Readers
Set/Hold (Freeze) the Reader Display
Figure Chapter 8 -3. Set/Hold Reader Display
When reading time code, there are times you will want to
temporarily freeze or hold the time code display, but not stop the
tape machine. Press and hold the [SET HOLD] key and the
display will freeze for one second, then continue to run.
Press and release the [SET HOLD] key and the display will freeze.
The frames' digits and SET HOLD LED will flash to indicate that
you are in set mode. This mode can be used to set a Reader value,
if there is no code on tape and the Reader position is being
updated by tach only.
Store Time Code
If you want to adjust the time code that has been captured, use
the CLR, up and down arrows, and set hold to enter a new value,
and press the [STORE] key. The time code value will be stored in
the RDR register.
To release (unfreeze) the display without altering the time code
value, press and hold the [SET HOLD] key for one second.
Because the tape machine was not stopped, the display will
update to the current time code address.
Reshaped Code
The Lynx-2 has a time code Reader reshape output. Reshaping
restores deteriorated code into good shape. The time code at the
Reader input is cleaned up or reshaped and output through the
RESHAPE output jack. The reshaped code can then be fed to
other equipment.
A RESHAPE output level, adjustment potentiometer is located
behind the removable front panel. Use this pot to adjust the
output level of the reshaped time code as needed.
8-6
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Time Code Readers
The reshaped output will not restore dropouts or convert discontinuous code to continuous code; it is only a "clean" copy of the
Reader input. To restore dropouts or repair bad or discontinuous
time code, the code must be regenerated. (See the Time Code
Generator Section.)
Figure Chapter 8 -4. Reshaped Code
Pilot
A Pilot signal, derived from the incoming time code, is available at
the rear panel PILOT OUT jack. The pilot output can be software
selected to lock to either the module generator reference, or the
Reader input.
A Pilot-level potentiometer is located behind the removable front
panel. Use this pot to adjust the output level of the Pilot Tone as
needed.
BWL
The BWL (BandWidth Limit) LED indicates that a 50 kHz
bandpass filter has been inserted in the Reader input circuit. This
filter helps eliminate spurious noise that might otherwise corrupt
incoming time code. It's usually only necessary to use BWL with
video machines. To switch the bandwidth limit filter in and out,
press [SHIFT and GEN REF].
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
8-7
Time Code Readers
Serial Time Code Reader
Introduction
Each Lynx-2 module has the option of reading Serial Time Code
for synchronizing serially controlled VTR’s. Serial time code is
input via the 50-pin transport connector on the rear of the module,
through the serial data communication lines. A separate
longitudinal input is not necessary if serial time code is present.
Serial time code is a function of the video tape recorder itself.
Either LTC, VITC or Tape Timer information can be encoded by
the VTR through the 9-pin RS422 port to the synchronizer/
controller connected. Its most common use is with video editing
systems.
It is essential that a video reference source be connected to the
Lynx-2 if Serial Time Code Lock is to be used, as time code
requests to the transport must be synchronous with this signal. If
no video is present, then the Lynx-2 will display [* NO VIDEO *].
When serial time code lock is active, the longitudinal reader is
completely disabled. All numeric information in the reader
display is obtained from the serial port. Serial time code can be
read in still, jog and shuttle modes.
Reader Features
•
•
•
•
Automatic detection of LTC, Tape Timer or VITC input over
the serial port.
Time code read in still and at jog and shuttle speeds.
Tape timer time code defines tape position and may be reset or
set from a KCU.
LED indicators showing valid LTC, VITC SERial time code.
Reader Source and Serial Code-type Indicators
The column of LEDs above the [SHIFT] key indicate the source of
serial time code used to update the reader. In some cases, two or
more LEDs will light to represent the specific reader update mode.
The following LED configurations may be expected when reading
serial time code.
8-8
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Time Code Readers
Table Chapter 8 -1. LED Configurations
Time Code Source
Serial LTC
LTC
VITC
X
Serial VITC
Serial Tape Timer 1
Interpolated Serial VITC
PILOT
TACH
X
X
Interpolated Serial LTC
SER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Note: “Interpolated” indicates that the time code is being updated from
control track pulses by the transport itself.
Difficulties Reading Longitudinal Time Code:
Level, Tape Speed and Frequency Response
Level
SMPTE/EBU Time Code is recorded as an analog, square wave
signal. Bit periods are derived using zero crossing detection, the
basis of biphase modulation. Time Code is demodulated by timing
individual bit periods and making comparisons to locate or
identify the 50% bit periods, which indicate an encoded binary
one.
Figure Chapter 8 -5. Time Code Word
Amplitude distortion during playback will not effect the Time
Code Reader, as long as the level of the code is above the
minimum required Reader input (-20 dBm). The nominal range is
-20 to +8 dBm.
When the code input is above the nominal level for the Reader,
difficulties in reading it are generally a function of tape speed.
The ability to reliably read time code off tape, under all conditions
and applications, is limited by the electro/mechanical limitations
of a specific machine, and the record/playback process in general.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
8-9
Time Code Readers
Tape Speed
SMPTE Time Code is a longitudinal data signal that requires a
minimum tape speed in order to be reliably detected. SMPTE/
EBU Time Code cannot be read at zero tape speed (still-frame).
(See VITC above.)
Lynx-2 is designed to decode biphase signals from 1/10th to a
minimum of 60x play speed. At very slow speeds, typically less
than 1/10th play speed on 3/4" VCRs and 1/20th on 1" VTRs, you
may see amplitude distortions that can occasionally cause
extraneous transitions from one time code value to another
unrelated value.
Frequency Response
The high-frequency (HF) limitations of a Lynx-2 system are
primarily related to the HF characteristics of the machines in the
system.
When time code is recorded on an audio track, the upper limit of
the audio channel playback amplifier must be modified to
accommodate the highest expected shuttle speeds or frequencies.
At the highest practical speed, such as 60x fast-wind, the nominal
frequency of the binary Zeros is 72 kHz; binary Ones are 144 kHz.
Also, signal amplitude is directly proportional to play speed. As
you can see, at these frequencies, care must be taken when
distributing and/or monitoring time code signals. (See Lifters and
Relays under Setup Options in the Features & Controls Section.)
Wideband Reader
When is a wideband Reader necessary?
The wideband Reader is designed to accommodate the HF data
associated with fast-wind transport functions. A wideband Reader
can read high-speed code and provide continuous, accurate
location information.
If a tape does not have contiguous time code, then tach pulses
cannot be used for accurate location. Since TACH uses the
measure or linear length of the tape to determine position in this
situation, reading code at high speeds is essential. The Lynx-2
Reader and software operate effectively in fast wind searches to
overcome this problem.
8-10
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Time Code Readers
Mute Lifter Control
The Lynx-2 has comprehensive mute relay and machine lifter
control functions so that optimum performance can be obtained
from the synchronizer.
• Tape machines are frequently, internally set up to mute audio
channels during fast-wind tape shuttle.
• When locating to a position on tape, Lynx-2 will intelligently
send lifter defeat commands to the transport to read the time
code, confirming that the tape is in the correct position.
The two setup commands mentioned above are an example of
mutually exclusive functions. They have a canceling effect, each
overriding the benefit of the other.
If you wish to read time code while in a fast-wind mode, then the
machine cannot mute itself. Conversely, if you don't want to hear
the "monkey chatter" in fast wind modes and wish to save your
ears and monitors, then the machine should be muted.
Some transports have a specific feature that leaves the audio
tracks muted, and unmutes the time code cue track. Unless your
machine has this feature, we recommend disabling the machine's
internal mute function when connecting it to the Lynx-2. Instead,
choose lifter defeat and mute relay commands, under Lynx-2
software control, that are suited to your application. (See Lifters
and Relays under Setup Options in the Features & Controls
Section.)
If you experience long lock-up times and the tape machine
frequently speeds up or slows down when synchronizing, check the
machine's mute status. If mute is enabled, disable it.
The Lynx-2 will park a slave tape machine approximately 30
frames ahead of the master. If the code mute on the slave
machine is enabled, it will park ahead of the master at a point
that only approximates the 30-frame park ahead. Then when play
starts, the Lynx-2 will read time code from the tape machine,
determine that the tape is in the wrong position, and have to move
it to the correct position. This causes the lock time to be longer.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
8-11
Time Code Readers
Non-contiguous Time Code and Error Checking
Non-contiguous time code frames can potentially cause "lock" to
occur at the wrong time code address.
The Lynx-2 Reader automatically ignores random or spurious noncontiguous frame numbers, which may be caused by tape dropouts
or invalid data in the time code bit stream.
Lynx-2 has internal error correction algorithms in the Reader
decoding circuitry, which prevent false transitions from being
detected as valid code addresses.
Error checking the incoming time code ensures very high
reliability of tape position. One or two randomly bad time code
words will be rejected and the module will continue to update the
Reader display, based on the last known valid time code.
Conversely, a legitimate jump in the time code is recognized by the
Lynx-2 Reader and will be accepted. The time code Reader will
display the new time code value and if in lock, will update the
time code error display to reflect the time code jump. Let's
consider an example of a legitimate time code jump.
A master reel has been assembled by editing together a number of
concert performances, from separate days, that were recorded on
prestriped tapes. The time code will jump to a new value at each
edit. In this situation, it is normally preferable to jam sync a time
code generator and generate a new continuous time code.
8-12
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Chapter 9 Sync & Resolver
Figure Chapter 9 -1. Lynx-2 as Synchronizer
Introduction
Synchronization is an integral part of modern-day audio, video
and film production.
This chapter provides detailed information for using Lynx-2 as a
Synchronizer/Resolver. Since synchronization can be a complicated process, we begin by reviewing synchronization principles.
A synchronizer provides the interface between, and control of, two
or more machines. This is accomplished by using time code, machine commands and tallies to locate and control position and
speed information that has been recorded on a tape.
The synchronizer is supplied with a master speed reference and
reads Master time code, which is used to control the speed and location of slave transports. By monitoring the master time code,
the Lynx-2 modules will control the Slave transports, locate to
specific time code addresses relative to the Master transport and
then go into play and synchronize. Synchronizing multiple machines allows a variety of production elements to be produced
independently, then brought together in a post production environment for final mixing, editing and assembly.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
9-1
Sync & Resolver
A Resolver uses a speed reference as a means of controlling one or
more machines. Resolving corrects speed differences between a
reference source and a Slave transport, but offers no means of accurate location.
Based on an output from the synchronizer, the resolver electronically controls the slave machine's capstan servo by sending a DC
voltage or FM (frequency modulated) signal to the capstan motor,
causing it to speed up or slow down to match the speed of the reference source.
Resolving a machine allows production elements that were recorded with pilot tone or time code to be replayed at a known
speed. Resolving is mainly used in the transfer process when
material is moved from one medium to another.
Most synchronization activities use SMPTE/EBU Time Code as a
standard for identifying specific location and speed criteria for a
tape.
Time code is a continuous stream of digital data blocks. Each time
code data block is comprised of an 80-bit word with a unique address. This address is updated each frame. The time code word
also contains sync bits, which are used to determine speed.
When recorded on tape, Longitudinal Time Code (LTC) provides
an exact indication of speed and position.
As with any other music or data that is recorded on tape, the time
code cannot slip. It will always retain its original physical
position and relationship to the program material on the tape.
Figure Chapter 9 -2. Time Code Data Stream
Generally an audio channel (on ATRs and VTRs) or address track
(on DTRs and VTRs) is striped with LTC. This can be read directly from the prerecorded track, either forward or backward, at
a wide range of play speeds.
If you are ready to stripe time code onto tape, please refer to the
Getting Started and Time Code Generator Sections.
9-2
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Sync & Resolver
Synchronizer Features
•
•
•
•
•
Rapid locate and sync lock time.
Subframe offsets supported.
Supports wideband LTC, VITC, serial time code or TACH for
location.
Automatic switchover to Pilot Tone input for continued
synchronization if time code is lost.
Speed-only resolver from either time code or pilot tone input.
Synchronization
When machines are synchronized, any number of events on different machines can be made to occur at precisely the same point in
time. To do this, a synchronization signal such as time code must
be recorded on each machines tape.
To synchronize two or more machines, one machine must be designated as Master and the other(s) become Slave(s). Lynx-2 monitors both the Master and Slave machines for speed, position and
direction. Any change of status or variance in the Master is followed or compensated for by adjusting the speed and direction of
the Slave machine.
In play, each Lynx-2 reads the time code output of the local machine and controls the speed of its capstan motor to adjust the
tape speed, relative to the selected Master reference speed.
In other transport modes, such as rewind or fast-forward, a signal
is sent to the Slaves indicating a change in Master status and the
Slaves respond and "chase" the Master. This type of chase synchronization is the basic configuration used with video-to-audio
and audio-to-audio systems.
Synchronization provides many enhancements and creative
possibilities for audio and post production systems:
1. The number of tracks or audio sources used in a project can be
increased as required.
2. Setting offsets between machines allows a tape to be put or
slipped out of sync by a controlled amount. Offsets, down to
1/100th of a frame are allowed.
3. Accurate record in and out points can be pre-programmed,
rehearsed and then automatically executed.
4. Synchronization of dissimilar formats or machines is possible.
For example; film, audio and video machines with MIDI sequencers or digital audio workstations.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
9-3
Sync & Resolver
Transport Control: Commands and Tallies
Synchronizer interface signals can be divided into two categories:
Commands and Tallies. Commands are signals generated by the
synchronizer to control the transport (i.e., Play, Stop and Record).
The Tallies are the responses from the transport to the synchronizer (i.e., Tach and direction).
Transport movement signals are derived from SMPTE/EBU Time
Code, Pilot Tone or TACH pulses. One of these is required for the
synchronizer to determine the position, and maintain control of,
the transport during play, fast forward and rewind.
To control the transport, the synchronizer "overrides" the capstan
servo. This override signal is typically an FM (frequency) signal or
variable DC voltage depending on the transport. The transport's
play speed must be capable of varying, within an appropriate
range, in response to this signal.
The Lynx-2 synchronizer compares the speed of the incoming time
code with the Master reference speed, and sends the appropriate
frequency or voltage to the Slave's capstan motor, causing it to
speed up or slow down to the correct speed.
Time Code Word
As SMPTE/EBU Time Code was developed by the broadcast/video
industry, the timing basis of the code is electronically
synchronized to the beginning of each video frame. Each video
frame is tagged with a unique identifying number called a Time
Code Address (TCA). This address has eight digits representing
Hours:Minutes:Seconds: and Frames.
The total of all time code information recorded for each video frame is
called a time code "word". Each time code word is divided into 80 bits.
Time code information is made up of binary ones and zeros, which
are specially encoded using a method called biphase encoding for
recording on to tape.
Biphase encoding reverses the signal polarity halfway through a
bit to represent a '1' and leaves the bit polarity unchanged to represent a '0'.
Figure Chapter 9 -3. Time Code Word
9-4
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Sync & Resolver
Each time code word is divided into groups of 4-bit segments,
written in binary-coded decimal (BCD) notation.
•
•
•
Eight 4-bit groups represent the time code address in Hours,
Minutes, Seconds, and Frames.
Eight 4-bit groups are reserved as User Bits. Here the user
may enter custom ID information, such as reel numbers, session information, time of day, or another time code altogether.
16-bits at the end of the word contain the 12-bit "Sync Word",
and two bits that identify the tape direction. The Sync Word is
a sub-unit of the 80-bit time code word.
The time code address is detected by the module's reader circuitry
and provides exact HH:MM:SS:FF to the synchronizer for positional accuracy. The Sync Word provides direction and Phase-lock
speed information, and marks the end of the each time code word.
Bits 64 and 79 provide the module with the information it needs to
detect the direction of the tape. These are the first and last bits of
the Sync Word that are clocked into the phase detector. A '00' after the 12 sync bits, indicates that the code or tape is moving forward. A '01' indicates that the code is running backwards.
Figure Chapter 9 -4. Sync Word
The phase change between the last bit (bit 79) and the first bit
(bit 0) of the next time code word provides the module the information it needs to resolve the capstan speed.
NOTE
Because bits can be defined with positive or negative transitions, the
resulting code is immune to phase reversals. Cables can be routed with
no regard for polarity.
However, maintaining consistent cabling polarity is good studio
practice, and will ultimately give you one less thing to worry about, or
question, in the heat of production.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
9-5
Sync & Resolver
Ultimately, the time code end-of-frame (EOF) from the code track
on tape, is compared with the system master reference source
pulses. The difference, if any, is automatically calculated by the
Lynx-2 module, and a capstan servo speed adjustment made to
correct the capstan speed error.
Figure Chapter 9 -5. Capstan Phase Detect & Servo.
Reference Source
The Lynx-2 module synchronizes to a common speed reference.
This speed reference is detected on the Master module and distributed to each of the slave modules, to control the speed of all the
machines. Press the [GEN REF] key to step through the five reference selections:
• INT - The module's internal crystal
• VID - An external video source
• AUX - An external auxiliary source
• MAINS - The module's AC power line frequency
• VSO - The modules reader speed, either fixed or varispeed.
INT
When lit, the INT LED, above the [GEN REF] key, indicates that
the synchronizer's generator reference source is the Lynx-2 module's own INTernal crystal. When the module is selected as
Master and the master reference is set to GEN, then the internal
crystal will be used as the system speed reference.
If there is no video reference, INTernal crystal is generally
selected as the generator reference source. The Slave
modules/machines receive the speed reference via the RS422
cables that connect the system modules.
9-6
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Sync & Resolver
Figure Chapter 9 -6. Reference Source Selection
VID
When lit, the VID LED, above the [GEN REF] key, indicates that
the synchronizer's generator reference is a signal coming from an
external video source.
This reference, which can be black burst, color burst, color bars, or
composite sync, is often generically called house sync. It comes
from an external video sync pulse generator that is referenced by
all machines in the system. Video should always be selected as
the generator reference when there are video or digital audio
transports being synchronized in the system.
If external video is the master reference source, each module in
the system should be connected to the external video reference.
This is easily accomplished by looping from one module to the
next, using the two, parallel, EXT VIDEO BNC connectors.
AUX Input
When lit, the AUX LED, above the [GEN REF] key, indicates that
the synchronizer's generator reference is a signal coming from an
external auxiliary source that is connected to the modules auxiliary
connector. The auxiliary input can be either a 50 Hz or 60 Hz signal.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
9-7
Sync & Resolver
The AUX master reference will typically only be connected to one
module. The Slave modules/machines receive their speed reference
via the RS422 cables that connect the system modules.
When the module is selected as Master and the Master reference
is set to GEN, the AUX input will be used as the system speed
reference.
MAINS
When lit, the MAINS LED, above the [GEN REF] key, indicates
that the synchronizer's generator reference is the module's AC
power line frequency. MAINS as a reference is normally only used
when it is necessary to synchronize with older equipment fitted
with AC motors, which run directly from the AC power line.
When the module is selected as Master and the master reference
is set to GEN, the AC MAINS will be used as the system speed
reference. The Slave modules/machines receive their speed reference via the RS422 cables that connect the system modules.
RDR/VSO
When lit, the RDR LED (above the [GEN REF] key) indicates that
the synchronizer's generator reference is coming from the time
code reader. When the module is selected as a Master, the master
reference is automatically set to VSO. When the master reference
is VSO, it indicates that the master machine is being allowed to
run at its own play speed (commonly called "wild" speed). In wild
mode, the capstan speed of the master transport is governed by its
own internal crystal, and is not regulated by the Lynx-2
synchronizer.
The master transport's varispeed control can then be used to effect
the play speed of the entire system. This is useful for off-speed
mixing.
When in VSO mode, the Lynx-2 module will follow the speed of the
master transport over a ±15% range.
A disadvantage of using VSO mode as the system reference, is
that wow and flutter is passed down from the master to the slaves.
Fortunately, this effect is minimized by digital filtering in the
Lynx-2 module.
Using VSO as the MSTR REF also provides for "code only" master
operation when transport cables are not available for a machine or
the Master code does not come from tape. More on Code Only
Master mode below.
9-8
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Sync & Resolver
When the module is selected as Master and the master reference
is set to VSO, the Master transport reader speed is used as the
system speed reference.
The Slave modules/machines receive their speed reference via the
RS422 cables that connect the system modules.
Remember, that AUX, MAINS and RDR are non-standard capstan
reference sources. These are considered non-standard because
there is no control over the reference speed and therefore if used
for time code generation, may not meet time code specifications.
The generator N/STD LED will flash as a warning, if the reference
rate deviates by greater than ±0.2% of nominal speed.
Time Code Frames
Once the generator reference source has been set, the frame rate
is automatically determined for the VID system and RDR
selections. If INT or AUX is selected, the generator frame rate
and code type need to be set. By pressing the [GEN CODE] key
one or more times, the module will step through the code types:
30, 29.97, 25 and 24.
The time code Reader will automatically indicate the code type
(30, DF, 25, 24) that has been striped to tape on the local
transport. The speed and code type on the local tape normally
should be the same as the generator reference source.
Gearbox Processor
The built-in Lynx-2 Gearbox Processor enhances the Lynx-2 machine control system capabilities by permitting the module to synchronize mixed time code types, at both fixed and fractional rates.
Accessing varispeed functions must be done from the TimeLine
KCU.
In stand-alone operation, the Lynx-2 can be used to cross-lock different time code types. The Gearbox does not alter the nominal
speed of each tape, but synchronizes each machine so that the
hours, minutes and seconds of each time code word correctly
match. This process is absolutely accurate and is identical to synchronizing similar time code types.
Details of the Gearbox Processor, cross frame and fractional rate
synchronization, are covered in Advanced Features.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
9-9
Sync & Resolver
Transport Communications
Each Lynx-2 module uses three cables to connect to its local
transport:
•
•
•
Machine time code input, connects between the module's
Generator [GEN OUT] and an audio or time code track input
on the local transport.
Machine time code output, connects between the transport's
audio or time code track output and the module's Reader (TC
IN).
Transport control cable, connects between the machine's
remote or synchronizer connector and the module's transport
connector. This cable sends transport control data to the
machine, and receives tallies back from the transport.
In addition, when two or more machines are used to form a
system, RS422 cables must be used to daisy chain the modules
together.
Figure Chapter 9 -7. Transport Communications
When PLAY is pressed on a transport, three activities are
initiated:
1. The master time code is read by the master module, and
transmitted via the RS422 serial port, to the slave modules.
2. The master module resolves and locks to the master reference.
3. The slave adjusts its position to equal the master time code
and locks to the master reference.
9-10
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Sync & Resolver
Servo Control
Transport capstan servos are normally externally controlled by
either a DC voltage or frequency modulated (FM) signal. Most
modern parallel controlled machines use a nominal control frequency of 9600 Hz. All manufacturers use one of these methods.
When a transport is selected from the Lynx-2 transport table, the
method of capstan control is automatically set.
Voltage Control
The Lynx-2 is preprogrammed to provide each machine's play
speed nominal DC voltage, and based on any error calculations,
increases or decreases the voltage to the capstan servo motor as
needed to adjust the capstan speed and maintain sync.
The Lynx-2 setup option, capstan wild speed, allows the nominal
(or center) voltage to be user adjusted to allow for any irregularities in older transports.
Frequency Modulation
The Lynx-2 is preprogrammed to provide each machine's nominal
play speed frequency.
Speed control is obtained when the Lynx-2 increases or decreases
the frequency, based on the synchronizer error calculation, which
in turn varies the speed of the capstan motor.
Frame and Phase Locking Modes
Lynx-2 has two modes of synchronization: Phase lock and Frame
lock. Phase and Frame lock are terms common to the industry. In
the Lynx-2 module, The default method of synchronization is
phase lock on. To change to frame lock, set the phase option in the
setup options menu to off.
Phase Off
Use the {LAST} and {NEXT} keys to step to the Phase option.
Enter the OPTions menu by pressing [SHIFT] + [MSTR] then
{OPT}. Set Phase = OFF, sets the module to the Frame lock mode.
Frame lock mode precisely synchronizes and slave(s) to the master. When locked, all of the information available in the time code
word is used to maintain synchronization. If a time code discontinuity greater than one frame occurs, the synchronizer will very
slowly resynchronize the slave machine so that the master and
slave time codes match.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
9-11
Sync & Resolver
Phase On
Use the {LAST} and {NEXT} keys to step tot he Phase option.
Enter the OPTions menu by pressing [SHIFT] + [MSTR] then
{OPT}. Set Phase = ON. The Phase ON option sets the module in
the Phase or Sync lock mode. This mode precisely synchronizes
the Slave(s) to the Master. Once locked, the synchronizer ignores
the absolute time code address values and maintains synchronization using the phase information from the time code sync data
bits.
This is the most commonly used mode, and should always be used
when tapes are striped with discontinuous code.
Sync Principals
A synchronizer uses time code signals to facilitate a frame-forframe synchronous lock between multiple audio, video, and film
transports. A synchronizer controls one or more tape or film
transports (slaves) whose starting position and tape speed copy
those of one specific (master) transport.
There are three levels of system operation available when using
the Lynx-2 module:
•
•
•
Play speed only or Resolve
Chase lock
System Controller
Resolve
Resolve is a control mode that synchronizes only to the speed of
the machines. There is no address information accessed or exchanged. One or more machines can be resolved to run at the
exact same speed without regard to tape position.
Chase Lock
In chase lock, the slave machines follow the master transport position and speed. The master transport can be shuttled or located,
and the slaves will follow. When chasing the master, the slave(s)
automatically switch from play to chase, and resync when the
master is put back into play.
9-12
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Sync & Resolver
System Controller
Synchronization via a system controller provides flexible control
of, multiple transports. A central control keyboard, such as
TimeLine's KCU (Keyboard Control Unit) provides options such
as, machine group selection, solo transport control, locate, looping,
offset, event points, and record in/out. The KCU is also used to access the Gearbox Processor fractional frame rate synchronization
functions. (See the Advanced Applications section for more information on the controller applications.)
Code Only Master
The Lynx-2 module can be used in a code only master mode. This
is done when the module does not support a tape machine that you
wish to use, or it is necessary to chase to a generator or "wild" code
speed. The slave machines will chase and lock to the master code
in the normal way.
Connect the time code feed or transport output to the TC IN jack
on the Master Lynx-2.
The slave modules are connected to their local transports with the
normal transport cables.
When in Code Only Master mode, the master reference must be
set to VSO, since it is not possible to resolve the speed of the
Master transport. The Lynx-2 module will then use the transports
speed as the system speed reference.
1. Connect the RS422 cable between the Master and Slave
modules.
MASTER
2. Press [TRAN MODE]
Puts the Master online.
3. Press [MSTR]
MSTR LED on
Select the code only machine to be Master
4. Press [MSTR REF]
VSO LED on
This releases the master transport from Lynx-2 control,
and permits code only operation. Lynx-2 is ready to read
time code off the master machine's time code track. The
time code position and rate is communicated to the slave(s)
via the system BUS.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
9-13
Sync & Resolver
NOTE: It is not important which transport setting is
selected on the code only master module.
SLAVE
5. Press [TRAN MODE]
ONLINE LED on
Puts the slave online.
6. Play the master transport, the slaves will chase and lock.
Synchronization Setup Procedure
This synchronization procedure assumes that you have loaded
each machine with prestriped tape, that all appropriate setup options are selected and that the appropriate cabling is connected.
Master Setup
1. Press [DSPL SEL]
RDR LED on
Press [DSPL SEL] one or more times to turn on RDR LED.
2. Press [TRAN MODE]
Transport ONLINE LED on
Put the designated master Lynx-2 online.
3. Press Play (Master Transport)
Time code updates
Play the transport for 10 seconds so that the Lynx-2 reads
time code.
4. Press [MSTR]
MSTR LED on
Define the system master.
5. Press [MSTR REF]
GEN or VSO LED on
Press [MSTR REF] one or more times to set Lynx-2 to the
desired master reference source.
Slave Setup
1. Press [DSPL SEL]
RDR LED on
Press DSPL SEL one or more times to turn on RDR LED.
2. Press [TRAN MODE]
ONLINE LED on
Put slave Lynx-2 into online mode.
9-14
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Sync & Resolver
3. Press Play (Slave transport)
Time code display updates
Play the transport for 10 seconds so that the Lynx-2 reads
time code.
Synchronization Procedure
1. Press [PLAY] (Master transport)
Puts the master transport into PLAY.
2. The slave transport will chase to the master position.
3. RESOLVE LED on
Lynx-2 has resolved the speed of the slave transport to the
Master transport, it is within 25 subframes of lock.
4. LOCK LED on
When the LOCK LED lights up on both the Master and
Slave(s) transports, the transports are locked.
5. Press [DSPL SEL]
OFFSET ERR LED on
Press DSPL SEL one or more times until the offset LED is
lit. You can verify LOCK by checking the subframes. You
should see >L0.00. The "L" means that the Slave is locked
to the Master and the number indicates the accuracy of the
lock in 100ths of a frame.
Lynx-2 as a Resolver
Figure Chapter 9 -8. Lynx-2 as Resolver
Pilot is one of the original methods used to facilitate synchronous
operation. It uses a resolver to maintain a constant transport
speed. Field production audio has traditionally used Pilot Tone as
a speed reference so that when the production masters are
brought back into the studio, a known speed can be established.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
9-15
Sync & Resolver
Pilot is generated from, and referenced to, a stable sine wave such
as the AC power line frequency. The synchronizer compares the
pilot frequency on tape with the master reference source. Any
speed differences will cause phase shifts between the code frequencies. The phase shifts are detected and fed to the resolver.
The output of the resolver controls the rotation speed of the transport capstan by generating an error calculation and correction signal. This increases or decreases the voltage or frequency sent to
the slave's capstan, until the machines are phase locked.
You could think of the resolver as a comparator, which compares
the speed of a transport against a standard reference and then
corrects for any deviation.
When Pilot Tone is used as a speed reference, the Pilot frequency
is always twice the desired time code rate. The four most common
pilot frequencies are:
•
•
•
•
60 Hz for 30 fr/s (B&W TV, NAB, USA)
59.94 Hz for 29.97 fps (Color TV, USA, Japan)
50 Hz for 25 fr/s (TV, cinema, Europe, IEC)
48 Hz for 24 fr/s (cinema, USA, NAB)
How Does a Resolver Operate?
A spare audio track is designated as the sync or control track. A
suitable sinusoidal signal from a crystal oscillator, a movie camera
or the high voltage AC line (stepped down through a suitable
transformer), is recorded as the speed reference signal.
On playback, the pilot tone on tape is compared to the system
reference, and the speed of the machine adjusted to achieve phase
lock.
Warning
DO NOT plug AC line voltages directly into an audio input. Smoke, fire,
major equipment damage and death can occur.
Pilot is also used to resolve master/slave systems. The master
control track becomes the reference source, to which the slave
control track is compared. The resolver corrects speed variations
on the slave transport.
9-16
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Sync & Resolver
This type of phase-locked synchronization is a relative locking
system. Its' success depends on putting the transports into play at
precisely the same time and location. Corrections must be made
manually.
Resolver Setup Procedures
This resolving procedure assumes that you have loaded the machine with a tape, with prerecorded pilot tone or time code, and
that all appropriate setup options are selected and the appropriate
cabling is connected.
Master Setup Procedure: Resolver
1. Press [DSPL SEL]
RDR LED on
Press DSPL SEL one or more times to turn on RDR LED.
2. Press [TRAN MODE]
ONLINE LED on
Puts the Lynx-2 online.
3. Press [MSTR]
MSTR LED on
Select the Lynx-2 as a Master, so that it will resolve the
tape.
4. Press [MSTR REF]
GEN LED on
Press one or more times to select the master reference
source. When GEN is selected, the generator reference
speed will be used to resolve the speed of the machine also.
Resolve Procedure
5. Press [PLAY] (transport)
RS422 LED on
Put the transport into PLAY.
6. Press [DSPL SEL]
ERR LED on
Press [DSPL SEL] one or more times to select the ERR
display. This will show >L0.00 and the module resolve and
lock LEDs will come on, indicating that the tape speed has
been resolved to the reference.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
9-17
Sync & Resolver
9-18
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Chapter 10 Gearbox Processor
Introduction
The Lynx-2 module's synchronizer has a gearbox feature, which
permits the module to synchronize mixed time code types, at both
fixed and variable rates. The module contains the necessary
hardware to perform the high resolution calculations required for
Cross Frame (X-Frame) and Varispeed synchronization.
In Stand-alone (SAL) operation, the gearbox function will automatically X-Frame synchronize, mixed time code types. When
used with a TimeLine Keyboard Control Unit (KCU), the gearbox
processors will synchronize at both X-Frame and variable speed.
Special KCU varispeed software has preset, standard varispeed
rates, or can automatically calculate the correct varispeed rate
from reference and slave sync points.
This section includes detailed information on the principles and
operation for both Lynx-2 and KCU Varispeed operation.
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Can be used with existing V500 Lynx modules.
Supports all time code types and rates.
30, DF, 25, and 24 time codes can run concurrently.
With KCU, ±15% Varispeed synchronization range.
Multiple methods for calculating Varispeed rate.
Preset standard Varispeed, NTSC Pull-ups and Pull-downs.
Machines can run X-Frame and Varispeed simultaneously.
Clear, concise KCU status display.
KCU software is quick and easy to use.
10-1
Advanced Features
Software
Lynx-2 Time Code and Film Module
Lynx-2, V700 software contains full feature gearbox functions designed to operate with other Lynx-2 modules. When used in a system with older Lynx modules, the Lynx-2 gearbox functions will
only operate if the modules are fit with V500 or V600 software.
We recommend that all Lynx modules used in a system, with the
gearbox processor, are upgraded to the latest version of V500
software.
It is not possible to operate a Lynx-2 module with Lynx modules
that are running TimeLine SAL "L" or "FL" Series software.
Keyboard Control Unit
Varispeed control software, K600, is supplied on two PROMs.
Both PROMs must be installed in the KCU for correct operation.
Read the Keyboard PROM Installation Guide, included in the
K600 software kit, for instructions on how to fit the software.
If you are replacing software earlier than KCU080-14, a simple
hardware modification is required to the KCU processor board.
Service Bulletin SB 91-003, which details this modification, is included in the K600 software kit.
10-2
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Advanced Features
Operation
X-Frame Lock
The Lynx-2 gearbox feature will lock or synchronize mixed time
code types. Supporting 30, DF, 25 and 24-frame time code types,
the gearbox can, if required, synchronize all four codes simultaneously. The nominal speed of each tape is not altered, but each machine is synchronized so that the hours, minutes and seconds of
each time code correctly match, as shown in Figure 10-1. This
process is absolutely accurate and is identical to synchronizing
similar time code types.
Figure Chapter 10 -1. X-Frame Timing
Any machine can be selected as the reference machine and all
slave machines will automatically X-Frame lock. All machines
synchronize at the rate of the Reference Source (Ref Src). For
normal SMPTE time code operation, the rate is 29.97 fps, which is
automatically selected when NTSC video is used as the system Ref
Src. When NTSC (29.97 fps) is selected, 24-frame code will run
slowly at 23.976 fps and 25-frame code at 24.975 fps. For EBU
time code operation, the rate is 25.00 fps, which is automatically
selected when PAL video is used as the Ref Src. When PAL is selected, 30 and drop frame tapes will run at 30.00 fps.
If the master reference source is Internal Crystal (Int), and the
time code type selected is 30 or DF, the system can run at either
29.97 fps (NTSC) or 30.00 fps. If 30.00 fps is selected, 24-frame
code will run at 24.00 fps and 25-frame code at 25.00 fps. See
Table 10-1.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
10-3
Advanced Features
When the reference machine, code type is 24 or 25-frame time
code, then X-Frame 30 and DF codes will run at 30.00 fps. To
correctly run 30 or DF time codes at the NTSC rate, 29.97 fps,
with a 24 or 25 fps reference, a KCU fitted with K600 software is
required to enter a -0.1% varispeed in the slaves.
Table Chapter 10 -1. X-Frame Rates
Ref Src
Rate
Slave Rate
30
DF
25
24
30.00
29.97
25.00
24.00
30
29.97
30
30
30
29.97
30
30
25
24.975
25
25
24
23.976
24
24
In X-Frame lock, the Lynx-2 module operates in the same way as a
standard module. Sync points and offsets are calculated by the
normal method and the processor takes care of the X-frame rate
conversion, see Figure 2. The reader sync point and offset error
time codes are displayed in off-tape time code type, but offsets are
calculated and displayed in the reference code type.
For example, if a 25-frame tape is being synchronized to a
30-frame master tape, then the slave Lynx-2 module will display
25-frame time code numbers, except for the offset, which will be a
30-frame time code number.
On the Lynx-2 module, a Transport Code Type LED will flash if
the synchronizer is in X-Frame, indicating the reference machine
code type, if it is different from the off-tape time code type. When
the module's Display Select [DSPL SEL] key is stepped through
the display options, the Solid Transport Code Type LED indicates
the type of code displayed.
Figure Chapter 10 -2. Offsets in X-Frame
10-4
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Advanced Features
Varispeed Lock
With the KCU, the Lynx-2 module will operate both X-Frame rate
and varispeed synchronization. Varispeed synchronization permits machines to run, locked together, at different speeds so that
time compression or expansion occurs.
Varispeed synchronization allows many new operational features:
tapes that have different running times can be fitted together;
program material with non-synchronous time code can be locked;
NTSC 0.1% pull ups and pull downs, and standards conversion between 24 and 25-frame codes requiring 4% speed compensation,
can be performed.
The way that slave machines lock in varispeed is internally, extremely complex. A machine in varispeed can be thought of as
having a constantly moving offset. At any point, the actual offset
(the real difference between the tape time codes), is made up of
two parts; the entered offset (time in the offset register) plus a
varispeed offset adjustment. These two components are used to
determine the positional relationship between machines.
So what is the offset and where is it defined? When machines are
in varispeed mode there is only one point, somewhere in the
"24-hour clock," where the actual offset is completely independent
of the varispeed adjustment. At this point, no matter what varispeed rate is selected, the machines positional relationship does not
change.
This point is called the "varispeed pivot point" and it is at this
point, on the slave tape, that the offset is defined. Looked at
another way, the pivot point is the place where the difference between the off-tape time codes is exactly the same as the time in
the slave offset register. In the example below, the varispeed
pivot point is at 00:00:00.
Consider two tapes with a zero offset. The master machine is
running at fixed speed and the slave with a +10% varispeed. If
these tapes are played from 00:00:00, then at 10 minutes the
master time will be 10:00:00 and the slave time 11:00:00. Even
though the tapes started with a zero offset, at 10 minutes the
tapes have an actual offset of one minute.
In the example, if the master tape is at 10:00:00 and the slave
varispeed percentage is changed from +10% to 0%, the slaves actual offset will be recalculated, and the tape would move back one
minute to establish its proper, positional relationship at the new
zero varispeed rate.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
10-5
Advanced Features
However, if the slave tape had been at 00:00:00 (the varispeed
pivot point), altering the varispeed would not have moved the
tape, as it is already in the correct place. From this it can be seen
that there is only one place where the varispeed percentage does
not affect the tape position.
In practice, the slave varispeed pivot point is not set at 00:00:00,
but at the start of the program material, or at some other relevant
point (i.e., the beginning of a sound effect). Then, if the varispeed
rate needs to be altered, the start time is locked in place and the
"sync" does not move.
With the KCU, the varispeed pivot point for each machine is set
by entering slave Source Sync (SRC SYNC) points. Figure 10-3,
shows the relationship between the reference and slave machine
with different source sync points, at varispeed percentages of ±
15%. If a source sync point is not entered, as in our previous example, then the default time of 00:00:00 hours will be used as the
varispeed pivot point, as shown in Figure 10-3, Example A.
Figure Chapter 10 -3. Varispeed Synchronization
Machines running in varispeed can be offset by all the normal
methods. The offset can be manually entered, captured or calculated from sync points. Offsets can be recalled and trimmed dynamically, if required, using the + and - keys or the Jog/Shuttle
wheel. When offsets are calculated for X-Frame machines, the
time codes are converted in the offset calculation to the reference
machine, code type.
10-6
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Advanced Features
Manually entered offsets are applied at the slave source, sync
point (varispeed pivot point). Some care must be taken when
manually entering or adjusting offsets. If the slave tape is not located at or close to the source sync point, the machine will relocate
to maintain the correct varispeed positional relationship.
Offsets can be captured by soloing the slave machine and pressing
capture followed by the calculator (5) OFST key. The offset is calculated by subtracting the current master position from the current slave position. If either of the machines are operating in
X-Frame rate mode, then the time code will be converted in the
offset calculation to reference code type.
In normal operation, each time an offset is captured and the
source sync point register is inactive (src sync key LED off), the
register is automatically updated to the current time code value.
The source sync point register remains inactive, but the new value
will be used as the slave varispeed pivot point.
If the source sync point is active when the offset is captured, the
register will not be overwritten and the captured offset will be
compensated by the varispeed adjustment; making the offset value
correct at the varispeed pivot point (source sync point). In both
cases the current position of the machine does not move.
The normal offset calculation functions of the reference sync (Ref
Sync) and source sync (Src Sync) keys and registers have not been
changed. If Ref and Src Sync points are set for varispeed machines, the offset will be calculated in the normal way and applied
at the source sync point. If no reference sync point is set, the system uses the record edit in point to calculate the offset. Figure
10-4, shows two examples of how offsets affect the relationship
between the reference and slave machines at a -15% varispeed.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
10-7
Advanced Features
Figure Chapter 10 -4. Offsets in Varispeed
When the reference sync or edit in points are changed, ALL machines with active source sync point registers will have their offsets recalculated and reposition. The source sync point is active if
the SRC SYNC LED is on in solo or status modes. If you do not
want a particular slave machine offset to recalculate, the source
sync point for that machine should be made inactive, by holding
CLR and pressing the SRC SYNC key, before changing the reference sync or edit in points.
Making the source sync point inactive does not affect the
varispeed pivot point. The system will still use the value in the
source sync point register for the varispeed calculation.
From an operational standpoint, offset entry and calculation, as
outlined, are quite straight forward. There is however, one special
feature that has been added to the KCU sync point software, to
further simplify operation. This allows slave varispeed pivot
points to be moved without changing the actual offset relationship
with the master machine.
In normal operation, if a slave varispeed pivot point is moved and
the offset is not changed, the slave machine will recalculate its position and relocate. For example, consider our earlier varispeed
example (Figure 10-4), with the master at 10:00:00 and the slave
at 11:00:00. If the slave source sync point (varispeed pivot point)
is now moved from 00:00:00 to the current tape position, 11:00:00
and the offset remains at zero, the slave tape would have to move
back 1:06:00 to be correctly in sync with the master.
If the reference sync and edit in points are inactive, the KCU does
a special calculation to prevent the slave from moving when a new
source sync point is entered. The KCU automatically updates the
slave machine offset to take into account the varispeed offset adjustment between the old and new source sync points. By updating the offset, the positional relationship defined by the previous
source sync point and offset is maintained. In our example, when
a new source sync point is set at 11:00:00, the offset register will
be updated from zero to 1:00:00 and the tapes will not move.
Remember, it is possible to clear the ref sync or edit in points,
temporarily, by pressing CLR and the REF SYNC and IN special
function keys simultaneously. The register values are not cleared,
but made inactive and can be recalled and restored if needed, after
the slave machine sync point has been moved.
Table 10-2, summarizes the conditions and changes to the pivot
point and offset, for each of the possible methods of calculating
offsets. Blank cells in the table are not used by the KCU, and the
status of these registers does not affect the offset computation.
10-8
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Advanced Features
Table Chapter 10 -2. Offset Calculation, Key Combinations
Ref sync or
edit in point
Source
sync point
Pivot
point
Offset
Inactive
Slave time
Slave - Mast
Active
No Change
Comp*
Store/Capt
Inactive
No Change
No Change
Ref
Active
No Change
Src - Ref
Slave time
Comp**
Capt offset
Store/Capt
*
**
Inactive
Active
Slave time
Src - Ref
Src
Offset is slave - master time, varispeed compensated so that it is correct at
the pivot point.
Offset is old offset, varispeed compensated at the new source sync point.
SAL Operation
Lynx-2 modules can be used to X-Frame synchronize mixed code
types in Lynx Stand-alone (SAL) mode. All possible code type
combinations are permitted, as shown in Table 10-3.
Table Chapter 10 -3. Stand-alone X-Frame Combinations
In SAL mode, the master module time code generator is used to
determine the system reference, code type and rate. The Lynx-2
module, generator reference source (Ref Src) can be selected to Ext
Vid, Int Xtl, Mains AUX or VSO. VSO cannot be selected when
the Lynx-2 is used in a system with V500 Lynx modules, or if the
master is to be X-frame locked.
To X-Frame lock with V500 Lynx modules, a Lynx-2 module has to
be the master. Set the Lynx-2 generator to the V500 slave tape
code type and select as the generator Ref Src. Remember, when
setting the generator for 30 or DF codes with Int selected, the generator rate can be either 29.97 fps (NTSC) or 30.00 fps. See Table
10-1, X-Frame Rates, to check that the correct rate has been
selected.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
10-9
Advanced Features
The V500 modules will synchronize with the Lynx-2 generator and
the master module will X-Frame lock against its own generator.
The generator information is only used internally and it is not necessary to run the master generator for the system to lock.
To indicate when a Lynx-2 module is X-framing, one of the module
Transport Code Type LEDs will flash to indicate the master
module generator code type; if it is different from the machine's
tape time code type.
If there are modules with V500-26, FV500-26 or earlier software
in the system then only the master Lynx-2 module can be X-Frame
locked.
SAL Setup Option
Setup menu option, "Master," in the Lynx-2 module is used to determine SAL X-frame rate operation. To enter setup, press the
module SHIFT and SETUP keys together. Press the ADDR key,
the "Editor and Address" column is displayed, then use the FORW
and BACK keys until "Master" is displayed. The Master option
defaults to V600, which should only be used if all the modules in
the system are Lynx-2's or are Lynx modules fitted with V600
software.
When this option is set to V600, the "time line" rate and code type
information is transmitted over the serial port so that more than
one Lynx-2 or V600 module can be cross frame synchronized, simultaneously in SAL operation. If there are any modules with
V500-26 or earlier software in the system, use the [↑] and [↓] keys
to set the Master option to V500.
KCU Operation
Several improvements have been made to the standard Keyboard
Control Unit. Information covering the KCU general operational
changes are covered in the KCU manual supplement, enclosed in
the gearbox option kit. These notes cover the specific differences
between K600 software and the previous KCU080-16d software.
A brief KCU080 software history is also included for those
installations where the K600 upgrade is from an earlier software
version.
The KCU detects Lynx-2 modules and Lynx modules fitted with
V600 on the Lynx Bus and automatically switches for X-Frame
and varispeed operation. All of the normal KCU operational functions have been maintained with only minor changes to accommodate varispeed operation. Of significant difference, is the
introduction of a reference machine. The reference machine is the
first transport added to the group after the Lynx bus is polled and
is marked with an asterisk (*) in the display.
10-10
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Advanced Features
The reference machine defines the system time code type, and the
system-wide time code numbers (i.e., edit in and out, duration and
offsets). The reference machine does not have to be the master
machine and does not even have to be in the group. A different
master machine can be selected by pressing a machine key (A-F)
and the SETUP key simultaneously.
As the master machine can be any machine in the group, the time
code in the reference sync point register will not necessarily be
from the master machine. The Ref Sync register always stores the
reference machine sync point. If the master machine is not the
reference machine, the master machine can have an offset. The
master will also have a source sync point, instead of a ref sync
point, which can be used to calculate an offset from the reference
machine in the normal way.
The KCU varispeed software has been designed to be easy to operate. In its simplest form, to varispeed a tape, all that is required
is that varispeed is turned on and a varispeed source sync point
marked. Comprehensive explanations of the KCU setup options,
and the varispeed rate calculator operation, is covered in the following sections.
Any combination of Lynx-2 and Lynx modules fitted with gearbox
processor cards and V500 modules can be used with the KCU.
X-Frame synchronization of mixed code type is only possible with
Lynx-2 and V600 slave modules. V500 modules can be used as
slave modules, but only with the code type combinations that are
shown in Table 10-4.
When a combination of Lynx modules are used in a system, the
most flexible configuration can be obtained by selecting a V500
module as the master machine. The permitted combinations are
as shown in Table 10-4.
Table Chapter 10 -4. KCU X-Frame Combinations
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
10-11
Advanced Features
KCU Setup Options
Two new setup options have been added to the Transport setup
menu and one new option to the System setup menu to control
varispeed setup and operation.
Press SETUP followed by the TRAN key to enter the transport
options menu. There are two new entries in the list, Number 3,
Varispeed and Number 4, Varispeed Percentage. The entries can
be accessed directly by pressing calculator keys 3 and 4 or by
stepping through the list using the LAST and NEXT keys.
The Varispeed menu has four options, Off, +0.1%, -0.1% and
Variable. The ± 0.1% settings are highly accurate preset calculations used for pulling up or down the NTSC 29.97 fps to 30.00 fps
frame rate difference. The pull up and down settings are used to
run machines at the correct speed when synchronizing with
NTSC tapes. Select -0.1% when using a PAL reference to run a
slave at 29.97 fps. Select +0.1% when using a NTSC reference to
run slave tapes at 25 or 24 fps. X-Frame rate code combinations,
where the preset NTSC varispeed corrections are required, are
shown in Table 10-5.
The Variable option is used with the Varispeed Percentage, for
setting varispeed rates to synchronize program material with different running times, or where standards conversion is required.
The variable percentage is adjustable by ±15%. The Jog/Shuttle
wheel or the + and - keys are used to increment and decrement the
varispeed amount. The Jog/Shuttle wheel increments the value in
10ths, and the + and - keys in 100ths of a percentage. The CLR
key can be used to reset the varispeed back to 100%, the default.
The varispeed percentage will be automatically updated if varispeed sync, "In and Out points," are entered in the Tran varispeed
calculation entry mode to calculate a varispeed rate.
Table Chapter 10 -5. NTSC Varispeed Corrections.
*
10-12
Ref Src
Rate
Slave Code
30
DF
25
24
30.00*
-0.1%
-0.1%
0
0
29.97
0
0
+0.1%
+0.1%
25.00
-0.1%
-0.1%
0
0
24.00
-0.1%
-0.1%
0
0
This case is unusual, because 29.97 fps would normally be selected for
NTSC operation.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Advanced Features
Press SETUP followed by the SYS key to enter the system options
menu. There is one new entry in the list, Number 4, NTSC Default. This entry can be accessed by pressing calculator key 4, or
by stepping through the list using the LAST and NEXT keys.
The NTSC default menu has 2 options, 29.97 fps and 30.00 fps.
This menu is used to set the master module, frame rate for
X-Frame synchronization, if the time code type is 30 or DF, and
the reference source is not Ext Vid or VSO. This should normally
be set to 29.97 fps, see Table 1, X-Frame Rates.
Varispeed Calculation
In most applications, unless the varispeed is a standard value, the
simplest method of determining the correct varispeed rate is to
use the KCU varispeed calculator. The calculator will calculate
the rate from four points on tape (ref start and end, slave start
and end) or as a ratio of two durations.
The KCU software has a special tran mode for varispeed percentage calculation. This mode is independent from normal KCU operation and is only used for marking points on each tape or for
entering known program durations for varispeed calculation. In
tran mode, the calculator automatically recalculates the rate, each
time a point is marked, and enters the new varispeed value for
that machine.
The varispeed calculator is entered by pressing the TRAN key twice.
The first press of the TRAN key enters tran status mode, the TRAN
key LED flashes, and information relating to the selected machine
is displayed. Press the TRAN key again to access the varispeed
calculator. The TRAN key stops flashing and the KCU displays,
TRAN: followed by the current machine letter and a flashing
"Varispeed" message to indicate that the KCU is in tran mode.
The current varispeed percentage is shown if the selected machine
will varispeed. If the varispeed percentage flashes, this indicates
that the rate, computed from the current varispeed calculator register values, does not match the actual varispeed percentage. A
varispeed percentage will not be shown for the reference machine
and V500 modules.
Tran mode is a special case of solo mode. The KCU transport
functions can be used in the normal way to control a machine and
locate specific points on tape. In tran mode there are start and
end point registers for each machine, which can be captured,
stored, recalled and trimmed in the normal way.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
10-13
Advanced Features
The varispeed calculator uses the IN (7) and OUT (8) calculator
keys to store each machines' start and end times. The calculator
then compares the slave times with the reference machine times
and calculates the slave varispeed percentage. As each machine
has independent in and out registers, it is possible to enter different points on the reference machine to calculate individual varispeed rates for each slave machine.
NOTE
The tran mode in and out varispeed calculation registers are not the
same as the edit in and out registers.
The varispeed rate can also be calculated by entering two program
durations. If the existing running time is stored in the reference
machine, duration register, calculator key DUR (9) and the new
running time in the slave duration register, then the calculator
will compare the two durations and calculate a varispeed
percentage.
Tran mode can be exited at any time by pressing the TRAN, GRP,
SOLO or ALLSTOP keys.
Display
The KCU and the Lynx-2 module have status displays to clearly
indicate the X-Frame and Varispeed status of each of the
machines.
The Lynx-2 module front panel has an LED marked VARI and will
show "VL00" in the offset error display to indicate that a machine
is in varispeed. In X-Frame, a Lynx module Code Type LED will
flash to indicate the reference machine code type, if it is different
from the off-tape time code type.
The KCU will display XL for machines in X-Frame lock and VL for
machines in varispeed lock in both group and solo modes. If a machine is in X-Frame and varispeed lock, only the VL will be
displayed.
The double letter group lock indicators to the extreme right of the
group time code have not been changed, and still indicate the system speed, reference source; for example, LL for external video
and II for internal crystal. When VV is displayed, it indicates that
the system reference source is VSO, and the system speed will be
derived from the master machine, time code input. The VV is not
an indication of varispeed lock status.
10-14
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Advanced Features
The tran status display now shows the code type and varispeed
percentage for a machine if varispeed has been selected. Press the
TRAN key and a machine key (A-F) to enter tran status mode.
The bottom line of the display will show the varispeed percentage
in place of the capstan wild or resolved message if varispeed is active. To exit tran status, press the GRP, SOLO or ALLSTOP keys.
Error Messages
A varispeed limits error message has been added to warn the user
that out of range varispeed calculation information has been entered. The KCU software recalculates the speed every time the
reference or slave in, out or dur varispeed calculation registers are
altered.
If a number is entered that causes the varispeed to exceed the
±15% range, the varispeed percentage for that machine is reset to
100%, and the following message displayed; "Varispeed reset, limits exceeded!" The actual values in each register are retained,
because the speed calculation may only have been exceeded temporarily, while new points are being entered.
Why set a pivot point?
In normal KCU operation, setting a source sync point is optional
and only used as a method of calculating offsets. Machines in
varispeed, by default, must have a pivot point for the varispeed
synchronization calculation. If a sync point (varispeed pivot point)
is not set, the KCU will use zero for the varispeed calculations.
The varispeed pivot point is the place at which the machines will
not move, if the varispeed rate is altered. It is very important that
a source sync point is entered, that is related to the program material, otherwise the "sync" relationship will significantly move
when the varispeed is changed.
The significant difference from normal operation when machines
are in varispeed, is that a source sync point must be set, even if
there is no offset required between the machines. Remember, capturing an offset or using sync points to calculate an offset, automatically enters the varispeed pivot point at a suitable time code.
Sub Frames
In some instances, when using the KCU, sub frame amounts will
appear in the time code registers. This is normal and is a side effect of either the X-Frame time code conversion or varispeed
adjustment process. For example, 30:15 in 30 frame code will become 30:12.50 if it is converted to 25 frame code. The internal calculations performed by the KCU are all high precision and always
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
10-15
Advanced Features
take into account the sub frame contents of the time code
registers.
Restrictions
SAL Operation
The Lynx-2 module will operate in X-Frame lock mode only. If the
master machine is X-Frame to the reference code type, the
reference source can not be VSO (master machine, time code
reader speed). This is because the master module generator is
being used as the "system reference machine."
If there are any V500-26 or earlier modules in the system, only the
master V600 module can be X-Frame locked.
KCU Operation
Lynx modules fitted with V500 software will not X-Frame or
varispeed against the reference code type. Check Table 10-3,
X-Frame Combinations, for valid operating conditions.
X-Frame or Varispeed operation can not be selected for the
reference code machine.
When the reference code machine is the master machine, the
reference source can be VSO.
If the master machine is not the reference machine and is
X-Frame or varispeeding against the reference machine, the
reference source can not be set to VSO. If VSO is selected as the
system speed reference, then the reference source will automatically switch to internal crystal, the system default.
Conversely, if the reference source is VSO and varispeed or
X-Frame rate operation is selected for the master transport, then
the reference source will be automatically switched to internal
crystal.
10-16
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Lynx-2 Film Option
Introduction
The Lynx-2 Film option card is a compact, and modular machine
control device designed for use with pulse-interlock film transports
such as dubbers, projectors, and telecines. The film option card
plugs inside a standard Lynx-2 Module, allowing the module to be
used with film transports. Using the Lynx-2 Film Module, a film
transport or interlocked film chain controlled via a pulse-interlock
bus may be operated from an external controller such as a TimeLine
Keyboard Control Unit, a video editor or an audio editing computer.
On the transport control side, the Lynx-2 Film Module operates
the same as the standard Lynx-2 Module, controlling the motion of
the film transport by means of a pulse interlock signal generated
by the module.
On the controller side, the Lynx-2 Module will operate stand alone
with other Lynx-2 Modules or as part of a controlled system. The
module can also be used with a video or computer editing system
using Ampex VPR-3 serial communications protocol. This protocol
emulation allows editing systems that are capable of serially controlling a VPR-3 to actually operate a film transport or interlocked
film chain instead.
Installing the Option Card
Procedure
Disassembly
1. Remove the power cord and all other cables from the back
panel.
2. Place the unit on a static safe workstation.
3. Remove the six phillips screws from the top cover, and remove.
(See Figure 10-5)
4. Remove the phillips screw securing the center of the main
board to the chassis. Save this screw. (See Figure 10-6.)
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
10-17
Advanced Features
Figure Chapter 10 -5. Removing the Top Cover
Assembly
5. Insert the metal standoff, in place of the phillips screw from
step 4.
6. Place the board in the module, aligning with the two plastic
standoffs. (See Figure 10-6) Make sure that the front panel
ribbon cable in connector J9 is not trapped under the film
board.
7. Connect the loose end of the ribbon cable to J7 on the main
board.
8. Press down on the option board, properly seating it on the two
plastic standoffs.
9. Using the phillips screw from step 4, secure the film board to
the metal standoff.
10. Unscrew the two front panel thumb screws and remove the
panel. The panel will stay attached to the module by retaining
lanyards.
11. Remove the two header jumpers marked option disable to
enable the film board option. (See Figure 10-7)
12. Replace the front panel.
13. Replace the top cover. Insert and tighten the six phillips
screws. Reconnect the cables and turn on the power.
Note:
Film software version LFI.001 and higher requires a wire jumper
modification to the Film Option Card PCB. Factory units from Film
PCB Serial Number 370101 will be shipped with this modification
installed. If the wire jumper is missing, the Lynx-2 will display the
error message [* NO FILM JMPR *]. Please refer to Service Bulletin
SB94-004 for complete information.
10-18
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Advanced Features
Figure Chapter 10 -6. Standoff Locations
Figure Chapter 10 -7. Jumper Location
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
10-19
Advanced Features
Theory of Operation
The movements of film transports are controlled by entirely different means than audio or video tape recorders. These differences
complicate integrated control of sprocketed and non-sprocketed
machines in the same system.
Control and Synchronization of Film Transports
Unlike tape machines, film transports always run under the direct
control of their sprocket drive motors. Once the various pieces of
film or mag film stock have been physically aligned to their individual start points on their respective transports, they will continue to run in exact frame lock because the motion of the drive
sprockets on all transport is controlled from a single, common
source known as a pulse interlock bus.
Film stock often has frame numbers physically printed on it at
regular intervals, but these are only used as reference marks during the initial positioning of the film. Once the system is running,
the sprocket holes provide all the reference that is necessary.
The pulse interlock bus, which controls a film chain most commonly, uses a two-component signal known as a "biphase" signal
that conveys direction information in the phase relationship of the
two components and speed information in their frequency.
A film chain's Fast Forward and Fast Reverse modes are frequency and phase variations of the pulse interlock signal, which is
also used to drive the system at normal play speed. Any device
that is used to control a film chain must generate the appropriate
pulse interlock signal at all times, and must vary the frequency of
the pulse interlock signal slowly and smoothly to ensure against
damage to the sprocket holes in the film from too-rapid
acceleration.
Additionally, the Film Module provides control over critical speed
and acceleration parameters to handle unusual circumstances
such as fragile film stock.
Functional Overview
The Lynx-2 Film option card contains two main functional blocks:
• Biphase Generator (Transmitter)
• Biphase Follower (Receiver)
10-20
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Advanced Features
The biphase sections of the Film Module can generate and follow
biphase signals to all known frequency standards. All operating
parameters are programmable from the unit's front panel and are
retained in the module's battery backed-up memory.
For compatibility with film equipment from any manufacturer, the
Lynx-2 Film option accommodates biphase frequencies ranging
from 2x frame rate (DIN standard) to 100x frame rate (MTM standard). The nominal film frame rate can be set to 24, 25, or 30 fps.
Biphase control signals can be generated at up to 20x the nominal
frequency, and followed at up to 40x the nominal frequency in
fast-wind modes.
Biphase Generator
The biphase generator is programmable for film fast speed
(maximum wind speed frequency limit) and acceleration. Deceleration adjustment is provided by the module's normal locate
speed parameter. Default parameter set-ups are provided for each
of the biphase frequencies. These defaults may be overridden as
necessary, and any changes will be retained in the module's nonvolatile memory.
The Film Module transmits film position information as time code
frame numbers to the system via the RS422 serial port. These
frame numbers are always tied to the biphase follower and are always related to the actual position of the film just as if they were
actually being read from the film itself. You have only to program
a starting frame number into the Film Module (using its front
panel controls) with the film transports at their start marks.
You may optionally connect an external set of motion control
switches to the Lynx-2 Film Module so that the module can function as a master film chain controller when it is the Master, in a
stand alone system. In response to the motion control switches,
the Lynx-2 Module generates a properly ramped biphase signal to
control the film chain directly. Normal, Preset Wind, Fast, and
Crawl speeds in both directions are available via these external
motion control switches. (See Appendix for interconnect diagram.)
Biphase Follower
The biphase follower in the Film Module keeps track of all film
motion relative to the start mark and the module generates the
proper frame numbers at any running speed up to 40x the nominal
speed. The frame numbers generated are displayed in real time
on the Film Module's front panel for convenient visual reference.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
10-21
Advanced Features
Time Code Generator
The time code generator in the Lynx-2 Module will generate either
SMPTE, EBU or FILM time code locked to an external video reference signal (e.g., "house sync") or one of the internal references if
selected. As part of its power-up routine, the Lynx-2 Module auto
detects if the video reference signal is NTSC or PAL and in normal
operation automatically sets the generator to the SMPTE or EBU
time code standards as appropriate.
In 30-frame systems, if the video reference signal is an NTSC color
video signal, the time code frame rate is 29.97 fps rather than the
nominal frame rate of 30 fps. In this situation, as the system master reference is derived from the generator the actual film frame
rate is decreased by 0.1% (e.g., from 24 fps to 23.976 fps) as is
standard practice. If the video reference signal is a true monochrome signal rather than an NTSC signal, the time code frame
rate will be 30 fps and the actual film frame rate will be equal to
the selected nominal film frame rate.
When 30.00 or 29.97 frame rates are selected then SMPTE time
code may be generated in either drop-frame or non-drop frame
formats. The Lynx-2 module also has a cross frame generator option, which allows generation of a different code type from the
selected nominal video or mains system reference.
A Tach-to-Time code function is also provided, which outputs time
code frame numbers at the standard time code frame rate in a
continuous jam sync mode. This time code signal provides frame
accurate position information in all motion modes but may not be
readable by all time code readers since some time code frame
numbers may be skipped, repeated, or in reverse numerical sequence depending on the speed and direction of the film transport.
Note, the nominal film frame rate may be different from the time
code frame rate. For example, the film chain may run at a nominal 24 fps while the Lynx-2 generates 25 frame (EBU) time code.
Interface
Pulse Interlock Selection
The Lynx-2 Film option is compatible with both biphase and the
less common Tach & Direction transmission schemes. Jumper
JP2 on the Film option circuit board, inside the Film Module,
allows selection of the pulse interlock output format.
10-22
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Advanced Features
The Film option card is factory preset for biphase generation. If
necessary, reconfigure the film option card for Tach and Direction
output by moving pin jumper JP2.
The pulse interlock input format can be software selected in the
AUX-1 setup menu. To access the AUX-1 menu, press [SHIFT]
and [MSTR] simultaneously, followed by {AUX-1}. Use the {LAST}
and {NEXT} keys to step to the film input selection and the [↑] and
[↓] to select either Biphase of TACH/Dir input. The Lynx-2 software defaults to the Biphase selection.
Figure Chapter 10 -8. Jumper Locations
Pulse Voltage Selection
The Lynx-2 Film Module is compatible with both TTL and CMOS
Input/Output voltages. Jumper JP1 on the Film option circuit
board, allows selection of the following voltage levels:
5V
12 V
=
=
TTL or CMOS
CMOS
The Film option card is factory preset for 5 Volt operation.
Pulse Frequencies
The Lynx-2 Film Module can be operated at any of the standard
pulse interlock or biphase frequencies. The biphase pulse rate is
selected from the TRAN front panel setup menu, and is retained
in battery backed-up memory when the module is powered down.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
10-23
Advanced Features
To operate a Lynx-2 module with a film transport the film option
card must be selected, this is done by setting the module transport
type to FILM in the transport setup menu. To access the TRAN
menu, press [SHIFT] and [MSTR] simultaneously, followed by
{TRAN}. Use the {LAST} and {NEXT} keys to step to the transport
setting FILM and the [↑] and [↓] to select the biphase pulse rate.
Table Chapter 10 -6. Biphase Rates in Lynx-2 Film Module
Nominal Sync
Frequency
(@ 24 fps)
Standard
(or Mfr.)
48 Hz
96 Hz
240 Hz
480 Hz
600 Hz
1200 Hz
2400 Hz
DIN
MTE
MTM
Maximum Generator
Speed Multiple
(& Freq.)
20x (960 Hz)
20x (1920 Hz)
15x (3.6 kHz)
15x (7.2 kHz)
7x (4.2 kHz)
7x (8.4 kHz)
7x (16.8 kHz)
Maximum Follower
Speed Multiple
(& Freq.)
40x (1920 Hz)
40x (3840 Hz)
40x (9.6 kHz)
40x (19.2 kHz)
32x (19.2 kHz)
16x (19.2 kHz)
8x (19.2 kHz)
Note:
The actual biphase frequency will be decreased from their nominal
value by 0.1% when the Film Module is referenced to an NTSC color
(29.97 fps) video signal.
Features and Controls
Film Indicators
The column of four LEDs in the transport section to the left of the
display window shows the selected biphase frame rate of the Lynx2 Film option card. The indicated frame rate is the actual frame
rate of the film on the sprocketed transports. The film frame rate
is very often different from the time code frame rate used by the
controller or video editing system. When the film frame rate is
different from the system time code rate the appropriate LED
flashes to indicate the system rate.
The film frame rate indicated by these LEDs is automatically set
to a default value based on the video reference signal sensed in the
Video Detect routine during the module's power-up sequence, but
may be changed to any other value in the AUX-1 Setup menu. If
NTSC sync is detected, the module defaults to a 24 fps film frame
rate, and if PAL sync is detected, the module defaults to a film
frame rate of 25 fps.
10-24
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Advanced Features
Frame Rate Indicators
30 Indicator
When solid indicates that the biphase generator and biphase follower are set for a film frame rate of 30 frames-per-second at sync
speed. If the module reader display is selected to TC, LED indicates the reader time code type. When flashing indicates the system frame rate.
DF Indicator
This LED is not used when a film transport is selected and the
reader display is selected to Biphase. If the module reader display
is selected to TC, LED indicates the reader time code type.
25 Indicator
When solid indicates that the biphase generator and biphase follower are set for a film frame rate of 25 frames-per-second at sync
speed. If the module reader display is selected to TC, LED indicates the reader time code type. When flashing indicates the system frame rate.
24 Indicator
When solid indicates that the biphase generator and biphase follower are set for a film frame rate of 24 frames-per-second at sync
speed. If the module reader display is selected to TC indicates the
reader time code type. When flashing indicates the system frame
rate.
TACH Indicator
Film motion is indicated by the TACH indicator in the Transport
reader source section of the module. When the TACH LED is lit it
indicates that the Film Module's biphase generator is outputting a
biphase signal to drive the film chain and the module's biphase
follower (reader) is receiving that signal. This LED will also indicate when the film transport is controlled locally in SAL master
mode. This indicator remains off when the biphase signal is
stationary.
DSPL SEL Key
The display select key is used to step the main display through the
display options so the GEN, RDR, SYNC PT, OFFSET and ERR
time code values can be read.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
10-25
Advanced Features
When the display is selected to RDR and [SHIFT] is pressed with
the [DSPL SEL] key the display toggles between "TC", the time
code reader input, "Bi", the film position and "UB" the time code
user bits value. If the reader display is set to show the film position then the film subframe position will be displayed in Stop and
slow motion modes. When the film is in play the subframe
position is masked.
The Film position can be entered from the front panel of the Lynx2 module or can be transmitted to the module from an external
controller such as the TimeLine Keyboard Control Unit. To enter
the film position from the front panel position the film transport
at the start mark or another known cue point and use the modules
display set/hold procedure to store a time code position.
The film position is always displayed in the "time code" type of the
biphase frame rate. For example if the film frame rate is 24 fps
then the reader position will be displayed in 24 frame time code.
STORE Key
The store key is used to enter a time code value in to any one of
the Lynx-2 time code register, and can be used to enter a new film
position. To enter or alter a time code number the module must be
in the set/hold mode, press the [SET HOLD] key to enter set/hold
mode. When the Film Module is in the Set/Hold mode
(SET/HOLD indicator flashing), pressing [STORE] will load the
current numeric value in the display window into the register
corresponding to the display selection and exit Set/Hold mode.
The right arrow on the [STORE] key, pointing toward the [DSPL
SEL] key is an indicator that the displayed number will be stored
into the register that corresponds to the display selection.
When the module is in the Set/Hold mode, press the [DSPL SEL]
key until the display is selected to RDR, the film position, change
the displayed value with the [↑] and [↓] keys. Press the set hold
key to step through each of the pairs of time code digits until the
correct number is displayed, press [STORE] to save the new film
position.
TRAN MODE Key
This key is used to put the Film Module Online or Offline, the modules status is indicated by the ONLINE indicator above the key.
10-26
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Advanced Features
When online, the Film Module transport may be controlled by a
SAL master Lynx-2 module, controller or video editor. When
offline, the Film Module's biphase generator will not respond to
any motion commands from the master module, external
controller or video editor. The biphase generator will, however,
respond to commands from a set of external motion control
switches connected to the film module so that the film transport
may still be operated locally from the module when it is offline.
The film module's biphase follower functions whether the module
is online or offline so that the module is always aware of any
movement of the transport and can update the current film
position.
Online Indicator
Indicates that the module is online and the film transport will be
controlled by the master Lynx-2, controller or video editor.
When extinguished, indicates that the module is offline and the
film transport will not respond to control commands. If the
module is connected to a controller or video editor it will report its
status to the controller as "OFFLINE" or "LOCAL".
Resolve Indicator
When lit, indicates that the film transport is running in Forward
and that it's position is within 25 subframes (1/4 frame) of lock
with the master transport or editor timeline.
If the LOCK indicator is lit and the RESOLVE indicator is flashing, it indicates that the module achieved lock initially, but an
Offset Error has developed that is in excess of 25 subframes.
Lock Indicator
When lit, indicates that the film transport is running in Forward
and that it is within two subframes (1/50 frame) of sync with the
master transport or editor timeline. When the display is selected
to ERR, a ">L" or ">XL" appears in the left of the display and the
numerical frame and subframe offset error in the right of the display as an additional indication of lock status. The "XL" indicates
that the film frame rate is cross frame to the system frame rate.
The LOCK indicator can only be lit if the module is online, and the
RESOLVE indicator is also lit (or flashing).
GEN REF Key
In setup mode the GEN REF key is used to select the AUX 1 menu,
the AUX 1 menu is used to access the film option card setup options.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
10-27
Advanced Features
AUX 1 Setup Menu
In setup mode, the GEN REF key accesses the AUX-1 menu. To
access the AUX-1 menu, press [SHIFT] and [MSTR] simultaneously, followed by {AUX 1}. The AUX 1 menu is available only
when a film interface option board is fitted in the Lynx-2 module.
It provides access to the following film options:
• Film frame rate
• Film acceleration
• Film fast speed
• Film input
• Film reader format
To select items in the AUX-1 menu, use the {NEXT} and {LAST}
keys to scroll left and right through the menu. Use the [↑] and [↓]
arrows to set the option that corresponds with your requirements.
Press [SHIFT] and [MSTR] to exit and save these selections as
part of the module's default setup. Once selected, the Lynx-2 will
initialize to these settings each time the module is powered-up.
Table Chapter 10 -7. AUX-1 Setup Menu
KEY
MENU
SUB-MENU
RANGE
GEN REF
AUX-1
Film fps
24
25
30
Film accel
4-32
Film fast spd
1-20 (limited by selected pulse rate)
Film In
BI-PHASE
TACH/DIR
Film TC
FILM
GEN
SYSTEM
Film Frame Rate
This option selects the nominal film frame rate at sync speed. It
can be set to 24, 25, or 30 frames-per-second. The selected frame
rate is indicated by the 24, 25 and 30 transport code type LED's.
NOTE:
If NTSC video is selected as the system reference, the biphase
generator will run 0.1% slow.
10-28
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Advanced Features
Film Acceleration
This option sets the ramp or acceleration rate of the biphase generator. The acceleration values are normalized to play speed. An
acceleration value of '1' means the biphase output accelerates at
1x play speed per second, with a value of '5', the output will
accelerate at '5' times play speed per second.
Film Fast Speed
This option sets the maximum fast wind speed of the biphase generator. The fast speed value is expressed as a multiple of play
speed; a value of '6' would limit the wind speed to 6x play speed.
The maximum fast speed that can be set, is also limited by the selected biphase pulse rate.
Film Input
The film follower or biphase reader input can be set to read either
biphase or tach and direction signal inputs.
Film Time Code
This menu allows the operator to set the time code format used by
the Lynx-2 reader, thus controlling the film cross-framing method.
FILM: The reader will operate and display the biphase frame
rate. Note, the biphase frame rate is set by the Film FRMS/SEC
menu option.
GEN: The reader will use the time code format of the LTC
generator. This corresponds to the way the original Lynx Film
Module operated.
SYSTEM: If the Lynx-2 Film is a slave, the reader will
automatically follow the time code type of the master module. If
the Lynx-2 film is a master, then
a. In a KCU system, if the Lynx-2 Film Module is also the
reference transport, the reader time code type will be
determined by the KCU FILM menu “Ref Code Type”.
Otherwise, the reader code type will be that of the actual
reference transport.
b. In a Stand-alone system, the reader will use the same time
code format as the LTC generator.
GEN ON Key
In shift mode the [GEN ON] key is used to set the time code
generator jam mode.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
10-29
Advanced Features
Generator TACH mode
When lit, indicates the film module's time code generator is in
Tach-to-time code jam mode.
To select generator jam to Tach-mode press [SHIFT] and the
[GEN MODE] key until the generator TACH LED comes on.
Enable the generator by pressing the [GEN ON] key, the
generator output will follow the film transport motion:
When the generator is enabled in the Tach-Jam mode, film motion
automatically initiates time code generation. When the film stops,
the generator repeats the last frame number in the stopped position for 1 second, then automatically switches off. The generator
ON LED will flash to indicate the generator is on but is not currently generating code. When film motion restarts the generator
will automatically restart and jam to the incoming Biphase signal.
In the Tach-to-Time code mode, the default frame rate for the
module's generator is determined by the system frame rate. This
default may, of course, be overridden by the operator at any time
as long as the generator is not running.
The Tach-to-Time code mode always generates time code words at
the same bit rate as normal sync speed time code (e.g., 30 framesper-second X 80 bits-per-frame - 2400 bits-per-second), regardless
of the actual running speed of the film, to allow reading by devices
that cannot read high speed time code.
Whenever the film is moving, but not running in lock at sync
speed, the module's generator performs a "flying jam" to the current film position on a frame-by-frame basis so that each time code
frame number generated corresponds to the instantaneous
position of the film at the start of the time code word. As a
consequence, time code numbers will not be sequential when the
film is not running at sync speed. Frame numbers will be skipped
if the film is running faster than sync speed, and will be repeated
when the film is running slower than sync speed.
When the film transport achieves lock, the generator performs a
single Jam Sync operation and then continues to generate normal,
sequential time code that is locked to the film position.
The individual time code words generated by the Lynx-2 Film
Module are always generated in the normal, forward sequence (bit
#1 to bit #80) regardless of the direction of film motion. If the film
is moving in the reverse direction, the module generates normal
time code words, which are in reverse numerical order.
10-30
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Advanced Features
Interface Connections
Transport Connector
The primary interface to the Lynx-2 Film Module is the 50-pin
transport connector, which contains all of the module's logic and
control signal inputs and outputs.
• Biphase generator output (film transport control)
• Biphase follower input (to follow film transport motion)
• Internal C/O relay (switches biphase based on operating mode)
• Record and Rehearse command outputs
• External motion control switch inputs
• Film transport mode tally outputs
• Mute relay (to initiate external muting functions)
• Remote Lock indicator output
TimeLine does not offer a manufactured interface cable for the
film module due to the customized nature of most film module
installations. Please refer to Table 10-8 for a complete listing of
the pin assignments for the TRANSPORT connector and the
appendix for a recommended interconnect schematic.
Table Chapter 10 -8. Rear Panel, 50-Pin Transport Cable Connector, For Film Module
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Signal
Ground
Transport ground sense
Stop tally
Capstan frequency output
Record command switch
Play reverse tally
Fast forward tally
Play reverse command switch
Play forward command switch
Lock Light or Ch 4 insert command
Channel 1 insert command
Rehearse command
Servo relay-A N/C
Servo relay-B common
Servo relay-B N/O
Biphase A In (Direction)
Biphase B In (TACH)
+5V (50 mA max)
Record-off command collector (+)
Search command collector (+)
Adaptor detect
Record tally
Tally common
Rewind tally
Fast forward command switch
Pin
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Signal
Rewind command switch
Channel 2 insert command
Channel 3 insert command
Servo relay-A N/O
Servo relay A common
Servo relay-B N/C
Biphase A Out (TACH)
Biphase B Out (Direction)
Ground
Record-off command emitter (-)
Search command emitter (-)
Play forward tally
Search volts out
Capstan volts out
Record-on command
Stop command switch
Search command switch
AUX Out O/C
-12V (50 mA max)
+12V (50 mA max)
Mute relay N/O
Mute relay N/C
Mute relay common
Search speed B
Search speed A
Biphase Connections
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
10-31
Advanced Features
The only essential connections between the Lynx-2 Film Module
and the film transport(s) are the connections to the biphase generator output and the biphase follower input. The biphase
connections shown in the "Lynx-2 Film Module Suggested Interconnect" drawing in the Appendix to this manual make use of the
servo changeover relay inside the Lynx-2 film module.
In the standard (Master/Slave synchronization) version of the film
module, this relay automatically reconfigures the biphase connections depending on whether the module's biphase output is controlling the transports or whether the film module is simply
following the biphase from an externally-controlled film transport
such as a telecine machine.
When the module is connected to a video editor, the changeover
relay is not required to reconfigure the connections because the
film transport must always be under the control of the module's
biphase output. The connections to the relay are therefore
optional.
Note:
Phase A leads phase B (by approximately 90°) for forward film motion.
Also note that in Tach & Direction systems, the phase A connection is
used for the tachometer signal and the phase B connection for the
direction signal.
Switch Inputs
The logic inputs to the film module for the external motion control
switch connections are high-impedance, active-high inputs. (note,
record in and wind speed selection are active low inputs.) Any
voltage from +5 to +24 can be safely used for the high, or active,
logic level. (The 50 mA +5 volt supply that is available on Pin 18
of the TRANSPORT connector may be used for this purpose.)
Because of the high impedance of these logic inputs, we recommend using a pull-down resistor to ground or grounding the normally closed contact of a double-throw switch as shown on the
"Lynx-2 Film Module Suggested Interconnect" drawing to
suppress transients that may be picked up when a long cable
length is used between the film module and the switches.
10-32
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Advanced Features
Record Command Connections
The Lynx-2 Film Module has separate outputs for Record On and
Record Off commands to allow the module to initiate and terminate Record mode on the film transport in response to edit commands from a controller or video editor. Each of these commands
are issued as a signal pulse of approximately 60 milliseconds duration. The normal Lynx-2 record TIMING setup menu is available to adjust the record command advance timing to the film
transport. See Features & Controls, Section 6 for more details.
Rehearse Command Connections
The Lynx-2 Film Module also supports a Rehearse command output to control any Rehearse or Preview function that is available
on the film transport or in the audio control system. The film
module may send various combinations of Rehearse and Record
commands to initiate and terminate the rehearse mode. The normal Lynx-2 rehearse command selections are available for a film
transport in the TIMING setup menu. See Features & Controls,
Chapter 6 for more details.
External Motion Control Switches
The Lynx-2 Film Module provides for direct control of the biphase
generator in the film module via an external set of six motion control push buttons. (Stop, Forward, Reverse, Fast Forward, Fast
Rewind & Search). This would most commonly be used when the
Film Module is being used as a stand alone master or when offline
(not under editor control) to allow the operator to position the film
to a start mark. An alternate application could be the connection
of a local "emergency stop" switch in a remote machine room.
External Speed Control Switches
The Lynx-2 Film Module also provides for external wind speed selection. Two logic inputs on the transport connector allow preset
wind speeds of 2X, 4X, & 6X play speed and Maximum wind to be
selected by the user. These inputs are active low.
The switches used for external motion control should be a conventional momentary contact type, with either a single-pole or
changeover configuration; suggested circuits are shown for both
switch types on the "Lynx-2 Film Module Suggested Interconnect"
drawing in the Appendix.
External Transport Mode Tally's
The film module provides five tally outputs to indicate the motion
mode of the sprocketed transport and a Record tally. These tally
outputs appear on the TRANSPORT connector.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
10-33
Advanced Features
The tally outputs are the open collector outputs of photo-Darlington
optoisolators. The emitters of this group of six optoisolators are all
tied together as the Tally Common. Note that all of these
connections are isolated from the Module Ground.
Note:
The mode tally indication changes immediately upon receipt of a new
mode command from the editor or from the external motion control
switch while the module's biphase generator will take a finite amount of
time to ramp its frequency between modes.
Mute Relay Connections
The film module provides a single-pole, changeover relay, driven
by the module's transport mode logic. This relay was originally
intended to provide a "dry" closure that could be used to mute the
audio output of the film transport or to mute the monitoring system, but its use is not limited to this type of function.
In the normal operating mode the relay is energized when the
module is in Fast Forward, Reverse, or Fast Reverse modes and is
unenergized in Stop, Forward and Crawl modes. Three additional
operating modes are provided under the Options setup menu,
which will additionally energize the relay while the transport is
accelerating up to sync speed and achieving lock. See Features &
Controls for further information.
All three connections to the mute relay are isolated from the film
module's circuitry to permit maximum flexibility in making external connections. The relay contacts are rated at 2 Amps for low
voltage DC applications (up to 30 Volts DC), or 600 mA for higher
voltage use (up to 110 Volts DC or 125 Volts AC).
Initializing the Lynx-2 Film Module
Once the Film module is connected to the film transport(s), an external controller, if one is being used and a suitable video
reference signal, it is necessary to set the operating parameters of
the module. This setup procedure includes:
• Setting the nominal biphase frequency in the module
initialization procedure. This also loads the default
parameters for that particular biphase frequency setting.
• Setting the appropriate Serial Address or Editor setting for
proper communications with the external controller or editor.
10-34
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Advanced Features
•
•
Setting the film frame rate if it is different from the default
value (which is determined by the type of video reference
signal connected to the module). At the same time, you may
also modify the biphase generator parameters from their
default values.
Setting a starting frame number for the module's film position
counter.
All operating parameters of the Lynx-2 Film Module are retained
in a battery backed-up (non-volatile) memory device inside the
Lynx-2 module. It is generally unnecessary to repeat any of the
module setup procedures unless the operational conditions change
or unless it is desired to "reboot" the module and erase all the data
stored in the battery memory.
Setting the Biphase Frequency
Hold the [CLR] key and turn on the module's power switch to erase
the battery memory and enter the initial configuration mode. Refer
to the Getting started section on initialization. The module will
first display, TimeLine, the software version number (V700-xx")
and then show "AEG M20" flashing in the window.
Press the {NEXT} key to step through to FILM and then use the
[↑] and [↓] keys to select one of the available biphase frequencies.
Press the [STORE} key to save your setting. Now follow steps 3-7
of the initialization process in the Getting Started section to complete the module configuration and store it in RAM. The module
will now reboot and sequentially display the information that you
entered.
Default Parameters
When you select the nominal biphase frequency, the film module
automatically loads a set of default parameters. Any or all of
these default parameters may be over ridden as necessary in the
AUX -1 setup menu. Any changes you make to these parameters
will be retained in the module's non-volatile memory until you
change the biphase frequency or reinitialize the module.
The default parameters for each of the biphase frequency selections are shown in Table 10-9. Refer to the Aux-1 setup menu
earlier in this chapter for instructions on how to alter these
parameters.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
10-35
Advanced Features
Table Chapter 10 -9. Default Parameters
Menu
Selection
48
96
240
480
600
1200
2400
Film fps
Film Frames
per Second
24/25
24/25
24/25
24/25
24/25
24/25
24/25
Film accel
Acceleration
Ramp Rate
032 (4x)
008 (1x)
008 (1x)
008 (1x)
008 (1x)
008 (1x)
008 (1x)
Film fast spd
Wind Speed
Multiple
012
005
005
005
005
005
005
Film fps - Sets the film frame rate of the biphase generator and
follower this is normally dependent on the type of video reference
signal; the default is 024 (24 fps) if NTSC video is detected or 025
(25 fps) if PAL sync is detected.
Film accel - Sets the ramp or acceleration rate of the biphase
generator.
Film fast spd - Sets the maximum fast speed of the biphase
generator expressed as a multiple of sync speed.
Operating the Lynx-2 Film Module
Serial Communications
Once the film module has been initialized, it is necessary to establish communications between the modules or the external video
editor or controller:
Press the [TRAN MODE] key to put the module ONLINE. If the
module is being used standalone with other Lynx-2 modules make
one of the modules a master and check to see that 422 communications are established.
If the module is being used with an editing system reset or reboot
the editor so that it polls or interrogates it's serial port(s). The
editor should now be in communication with the Lynx-2 Module.
Verify that the RS422 light on the Film Module is illuminated,
which indicates that the module has been addressed by the editor
and is receiving valid serial messages.
Note that failure of communications can be caused by incorrect
Editor or serial address setting or improper serial cable connections between the module and the editor.
10-36
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix
Introduction
The appendix has three sections: Time Code Overview, Quick
Reference Guide, Cable Reference Guide and Glossary.
Time Code Overview
A review of how and why the various SMPTE/EBU time code
formats evolved, what they mean and how they impact the
production process.
Quick Reference and Cable Reference Guide
Provides setup and cabling information to help you configure and
use the Lynx-2.
Auto Serial Transport Table
Contains a list of the serially controlled transports currently
recognized by the transport menu setting AUTO Ser TRAN.
Keyboard Control Unit Modifications
Provides Service Bulletin (SB91-003) modification instructions for
the KCU.
Lynx-2 Film Option Card PCB Modifications
Provides Service Bulletin (SB94-004) modification instructions for
the Film Option Card.
Glossary
An alphabetic list of terms used during the discussion of the Lynx-2.
Technical Information
Provides drawings and interface information referenced within the
text of the manual.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix- 1
Appendix
Appendix - 2
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Time Code Overview
Introduction
The following is a review of how and why the various SMPTE/EBU
time code formats evolved, what they mean and how they impact
the production process.
When the television broadcast industry moved from film and live
performance to prerecorded video production, a method was required to reliably synchronize and edit the new medium. Historically, film rushes were marked with footage numbers and, by default, the film was automatically synchronized by its sprocket
holes.
Unfortunately, video tape had neither of these attributes. This
created a problem: how to synchronize music, picture, dialogue
and effects that have been recorded on separate reels of tape?
The solution was SMPTE time code. SMPTE, which stands for the
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers, was chosen as
the industry standard in 1971. When the European Broadcast
Union (EBU) adopted the code standard, it became officially
known as SMPTE/EBU time code.
SMPTE/EBU time code is a biphase encoded, analog signal
containing specific address and speed information. This data can
be recorded on audio or video tape, and used for accurate
positioning and synchronization.
If you know precisely where a piece of program is and how fast it
is playing, it is possible to use that information to control other
machines; so that they are all in the same place at exactly the
same time.
A SMPTE/EBU frame or word consists of 80 bits that convey the
time code message of Hours, Minutes, Seconds and Frames. This
message is usually abbreviated as HH:MM:SS:FF.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix - 3
Appendix
Each bit is represented by a binary '1' or '0' that is specially encoded for recording onto tape. A continuous stream of these
80-bit words is recorded linearly along the tape to form Longitudinal Time Code (LTC). The code's design and organization makes it
suitable for use over a very wide range of play-speeds, both forward and backward. The frequency of the LTC signal is always
proportional to the tape speed.
There are 60 minutes in an hour and 60 seconds in a minute. But
how many frames are there in a second? This is where time code
gets confusing if you don't understand and use the correct
terminology.
Time code always provides two pieces of information: The rate or
speed at which a tape is moving and the counting method that is
employed, when displaying the time code numbers on a display.
They are not always the same.
The confusion arises because there are different operating speeds
for color TV, B&W TV, and film in the USA and Europe that were
historically related to the AC power line frequencies. Thus, time
code has several different formats, defined by combining one of
four different frame rates, with one of four different counting
methods or code types.
"Frame rate" is the terminology used to define the speed, in
frames-per-second, that time code is generated. (30, 29.97, 25 and
24 Hz.)
"Code type" defines the method or way in which frames are
counted. (NDF, DF, 25 and 24.)
It is quite common to use "short hand" references without
specifying all the necessary time code information. If someone
asks what time code format you are using and you say, "non-drop
frame", the other person has a 50/50 chance of getting the frame
rate or speed correct. Accurate use of terminology will eliminate
many opportunities for confusion when working with machine
control synchronizers.
Example: Time code running at a frame rate of 29.97 can use, as
its code type, Non-Drop Frame or Drop Frame. Defining a time
code format as 29.97 DF means that the time code was generated
at a rate of 29.97 fps, and is using the drop frame counting
method. Therefore, time code format is a combination of both
frame rate and code type.
Appendix - 4
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix
30 NDF and NTSC
NTSC stands for National Television Standards Committee.
Electrical wall current in the U.S. has a frequency of 60 Hz.
NTSC used 60 Hz as a convenient reference for the 30 Hz frame
sync pulse needed to control the vertical hold of a B&W picture.
When black and white TV was the only game in town, video
frames were advanced at a rate of 30 fps. This monochrome
standard is now known as 30 Non-Drop Frame (30 NDF).
When using 30 NDF, the time code display, the elapsed time of a
program and the "clock on the wall" are all in agreement.
Drop Frame
When color television was invented, things got more complicated,
for technical reasons. NTSC decided that 60 Hz wasn't quite right
and changed the color reference to 59.940026 Hz. Consequently
the monochrome frame rate standard of 30 fps was reduced to
approximately 29.97 fps, which became the color frame rate
standard.
When the frame rate was reduced to 29.97 Hz, a whole host of
potential problems arose. To begin with, one hour on the time
code display did not represent an hour of elapsed program time.
In order to compensate for the difference between the color
reference and the actual elapsed time, some form of frame
counting adjustment was required. As the clock ticks away each
second, only 29.97 frames are broadcast instead of 30 frames.
Because the video is running fractionally slower than the clock on
the wall, only 29.97 frames instead of 30 frames roll by for each
second of real time. At this rate, over the course of an hour, the
time code display shows that the program tape has run 3.6
seconds (or 108 frames) slower than the clock on the wall.
Example:
NDF: 60 sec. x 30 fps = 1800 fpm x 60 min/hr. = 108,000 elapsed
frames.
DF: 60 sec. x 29.97 fps = 1798.2 fpm x 60 min/hr. = 107,892
elapsed frames.
NDF
108,000
DF
- 107,892
Difference =
108 frames
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix - 5
Appendix
Somehow, a counting method had to be developed to make the
time code display match real time. The drop frame counting
format was the answer. Now keep in mind, all that is happening
is that the time code display is using a non-linear counting method
that ignores same numbers. The frame rate or number of frames
that pass by each minute is not altered.
DF skips the first two frame counts in each minute (with the
exception of minutes 00, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50). This has the effect of
adjusting the frame count so that it agrees with the actual elapsed
time of the program. (You don't suppose the IRS would allow this
as an alternative accounting method do you?)
Example: Two frames each minute x 60 min = 120 fph. As seen
above, the goal was to make up exactly 108 frames. For the final
adjustment, the solution was to not drop the first two frame
counts on minutes 00, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50.
By not dropping two frames from those 10-minute marks, the time
code display could make up exactly 108 frames over the course of
one hour. Now when the sync display and the "atomic wall clock"
are stopped after exactly one hour, they both read 01:00:00:00.
30 DF
30 DF is a non-standard time code format. It indicates time code
that has a frame rate of 30 fps, but is counted with specified frame
numbers dropped every minute. The time code display is 0.1%
faster than elapsed time.
29.97 DF
29.97 DF is a standard time code format. It indicates time code
that has a frame rate of 29.97 fps and is counted with specified
frame numbers dropped every minute. This time code display is
identical to elapsed time.
29.97 NDF
29.97 NDF is a standard time code format. It indicates time code
that has a frame rate of 29.97 fps, but is counted normally with no
frames dropped. The time code display is 0.1% slower than
elapsed time.
25, 25 or EBU/PAL
In Europe, the standard wall AC current frequency is 50 Hz. Thus
there is another video format: PAL (Phase Alternate Line). This
standard was established by the European Broadcast Union
(EBU) for color and B&W television. The time code runs at half
the frequency 25 Hz, and 25 frames are counted per second.
Appendix - 6
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix
Drop Frame is never necessary, nor an option, when operating
with 25 frame time code. The code display is identical to elapsed
time.
24, 24 or Film
24 is the standard film rate and code type, and has remained the
same since the days of its invention.
Drop Frame is never necessary, nor an option, when operating
with 24 frame time code. The time code display is identical to
elapsed time.
Note
Do not use non-standard 30 DF time code unless you are an expert and
have a good reason to do so. This is only used to increase play back
speed by 0.1% to correct program speed errors.
Frame Rates by Region
Region
USA, Japan
Europe
TV Standard
NTSC
PAL/SECAM
Mains Frequency
60 Hz
50 Hz
Frame Rate
30
Code Type
NDF
Display
real time
30
29.97
DF
DF
0.1 % fast
real time
29.97
NDF
0.1% slow
25
25
real time
24
24
real time
Frame Rate
30 Hz (nominal)
25 Hz
Code Types by Region
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Application
NTSC B&W standard for
USA & Japan
Non-standard
NTSC color standard for
USA & Japan
Music recording for USA &
Japan
European TV & music
recording
Film
Appendix - 7
Appendix
Appendix - 8
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Quick Reference Guide
SHIFT Mode
To access a shifted function, press [SHIFT] plus:
KEY
NAME
ACTION
TRAN MODE
RSLV
Reserved for future use
SYNC POINT
<<
Transport rewind
SET HOLD
>>
Transport fast forward
DOWN ARROW
o
Transport stop
CLR
>
Transport play
UP ARROW
REH
Transport rehearse
STORE
REC
Transport record
DSPL SEL
UBITS
Display user bits
GEN CODE
JAM
Manual generator jam
GEN ON
MODE
Selects jam mode: JAM TC - Jam to
reader after 2 frames
JAM UB - Jam reader
time into user bits
TACH - Gen follows tach
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
GEN REF
BWL
Toggles bandwidth limit
MSTR REF
VERS
Display software versions
MSTR
SETUP
Enter Setup mode
Appendix - 9
Appendix
SETUP Mode
To enter setup mode press [SHIFT] + [SETUP]. Then press:
KEY
GEN CODE
MENU
ADDR
SUB-MENU
Address
Editor
Mstr type
GEN ON
OPT
Capst wild
Gen msg hold
Lift dft
Locate speed
Lock delay
Lock window
Mute
Park ahead
Phase lock
Pilot out
Sample rate
Ser init
Ser Tape/ee
Ser TC
Ser TC lock
Vid park win
X-frame gen
GEN REF
AUX-1
Film
FRMS/SEC
Film accel
Film fast spd
Film in
Film TC
Appendix - 10
RANGE
0 - 127
KCU
Old KCU
CMX
GVG
ACE
V500
V7/600
-128 - +127
OFF
ON
OFF
AUTO
WIND
ALWAYS
20 - 255
0-50 frames
0-75 subframes
NORMAL
UNTIL RSLV
UNTIL LOCK
NOT LCK/STP
IF NOT LOCK
0 - 30
ON
OFF
GEN
RDR
48
44.1
ON
OFF
TAPE
LCL
AUTO
OFF [TT1]
LTC/VITC
LTC
VITC
ON
OFF
0-10 frames
ON
OFF
24
25
30
4-32
1 - 20
BI-PHASE
TACH/DIR
FILM
GEN
SYSTEM
VRC2
BOSS
CASS
POGOL
TLC
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix
SETUP Mode (continued)
KEY
DISPL SEL
STORE
MENU
TRAN
TIMING
SUB-MENU
AEG
Akai
Ampex
RANGE
M-20
DR-1200
ATR-100
ATR-124
MM1200
IN ADV High
OUT ADV High
IN ADV Med
OUT ADV Med
IN ADV Low
OUT ADV Low
Rehearse IN
0 - 255 ms
0 - 255 ms
0 - 255 ms
0 - 255 ms
0 - 255 ms
0 - 255 ms
0 - Latch REH
1 - Pulse REH
2 - Pulse REH + PLAY
3 - Pulse REH + REC IN
4 - Latch REH + REC IN
5 - Pulse REC
6 - Long Latch REH + REC IN
0 - Unlatch REH
1 - Pulse PLAY
2 - Pulse REH
3 - Pulse PLAY + REC OUT
4 - Pulse REC
5 - Pulse REH then PLAY
Rehearse OUT
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
VPR-3
VPR-6
VPR-80
VPR-300
Appendix - 11
Appendix
Appendix - 12
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Cable Reference Guide
Lynx Transport Control Cables
Transport
Manufacturer
Machine
Model
Setup Menu
Description
Cable Type
Description
71C079
Accom
WSD
WSD
Lynx Serial
Special Order
AEG
M-20
M-20
M-20
71C031
Akai
ADAM
DR-1200
DR-1200
71384
Alesis
AI2/ADAT
AI2/ADAT
AI2/ADAT (Lynx-2 only)
71C001
Ampex
ATR-100
ATR-100
ATR-100
71C002
Ampex
ATR-124
ATR-124
ATR-124
71C003
Ampex
MM-1200
MM-1200
MM-1200
71C079
Ampex
VPR-3
VPR-6
VPR-80
VPR-300
VPR-3
VPR-6
VPR-80
VPR-300
Lynx Serial
71C077
Denon
DN-3603 RA
DN-3603 RA
DEN-3603
Denon
DN-3603G
DN-3603G
71388
Fostex
Model 20
Model 20
Model 20
71C079
Fostex
D-20
RD-8
D-20
RD-8
Lynx Serial
71C004
Fostex
E-2
E-8
E-16
E-22
G-16
G-24
E-16
E & G Series
71C005
JVC
CR-850
CR-600
CR-850
JVC Type A
(Parallel interface) (Y Cable)
71C079
JVC
CR-850
CR-850 s
Lynx Serial
71C007
JVC
BR-610
BR-611
BR-610
JVC Type B (Y Cable)
BR-810
BR-811
BR-810
BR-5610
BR-5810
BR-8600U
BR-7700U
BR-8600
BR-8600E
BR-7700E
BR-8600E
TimeLine
Part No.
71C008
JVC
CR-5500
CR-6650
CR-8250
CR-8250
JVC Type C (Y Cable)
Special Order
3M
M-79
M-79
M79 (Dealer installation recommended)
71C010
Mitsubishi
X-86
X-86
X-86
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix - 13
Appendix
Cable Reference Guide Continued
Lynx Transport Control Cables
TimeLine
Transport
Manufacturer
Machine
Model
Setup Menu
Description
Cable Type
Description
Mitsubishi
X-850
X-850 a
X-850 d
X-850
X-880
X-880 a
X-880 d
Part No.
71C011
71C012
Otari
MTR-10/1
MTR-12/1
MTR-10-1
MTR-12-1
MTR-10/12, Series I
(20-pin Honda connectors)
71C029
Otari
MTR-10/2
MTR-12/2
MTR-20
MTR-15
MX-55
MX-70
MX-80
MX-70 Layback
MTR-100
MTR-100V
MTR-10-2
MTR-12-2
MTR-20
MTR-15
MX-55
MX-70
MX-70
MX-70 L
MTR-100
MTR-100 v
Otari Type A
DTR-900/1
DTR-900-1a
DTR-900-1d
DTR-900/2
DTR-900-2a
DTR-900-2d
71C013
Otari
MTR-90/1
MTR-90-1
MTR-90, Series I (50-pin & 9-pin
“D” connector) (Y Cable)
71C030
Otari
MTR-90/2
MTR-90/2 Layback
MTR-90/3
MTR-90-II
MTR-90-IIL
MTR-90-II v
MTR-90, Series II
(25-pin Honda connector)
71C014
Otari
MX-5050/3
5050-III
MX-5050 MkIII Series, 16-pin
(older machines)
71C015
Otari
MX-5050/3
5050-III
MX-5050 MkIII Series, 34-pin
(current machines)
71C016
Otari
MX-5050/3
5050-III
MX-5050 MkIII Series, 34-pin “Y” (current
machines) (Y Cable)
71C079
Otari
DTR-90
DTR-90
Lynx Serial
71C079
Panasonic
AG-7750
AG-7700
AG-7750
Lynx Serial
AJ-D350
AJ-D350
71C078
Saturn
824
824
824 (a.k.a. Soundcraft Saturn)
71C017
Sony
PCM-3402
3402 a
3402 d
3402 sa
3402 sd
Sony Type A
APR-24
APR-5000
APR-24
APR-5000
(No longer available)
Sony
BVU-800
BVU-800 p
BVU-800 (Parallel interface)
71C019
Sony
JH-24
JH-114 Late Model
JH-16
JH-24
JH-24 (Machines with 12-pin “Autolocator”
connector) (Y Cable)
71C020
Sony
JH-110 ABC
JH-114 Early Model
JH--114
JH-110 (Machines with 21-pin “Synchronizer”
connector) (Y Cable)
Appendix - 14
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix
Cable Reference Guide Continued
Lynx Transport Control Cables
TimeLine
Transport
Manufacturer
Machine
Model
Setup Menu
Description
Cable Type
Description
Sony
PCM-3324
3324 a
3324 d
PCM-3324
PCM-3324S
3324s a
3324s d
PCM-3348
3348 a
3348 d
Part No.
71C021
71389
Sony
PCM-7030fm
7030 fm
PCM-7030 FM (Vari-speed operation)
71C022
Sony
VO-5800
5850 ext
VO-5850 (Lynx only) (Y Cable)
71380
Sony
VO-5850
5850 int
VO-5850 Straight cable (Lynx-2 only)
71C079
Sony
PCM-7030
PCM-7050
7030
Lynx Serial
VO-9800
VO-9850
9800
BVW-10
BVW-40
BVW-75
BVM-10
BVW-40
BVW-75
BVU-800
BVU-800 s
BVU-950
BVU-950
BVH-2000
BVH-2800
BVH-3000
BVH-2000
DMR-4000
DMR-4000
DVR-10/18
DVR-1000
DVR-10
DVR-1000
DVW-500
DVW-A500
DVW-510
DVW-A510
DVW-CA510
DVW-CA510
DVW-500
UVW-1800
UVW-1800
Special Order
Stellavox
TD-9
TD-9
TD-9
71C034
Studer
A-807
A-807 p
A-807 s
Studer Type B
A-810
A-810
A-812
A-812 p
A-812 s
A-820 1/2”
A-820 p
A-820 s
A-820 32 Hz
A-820 p
A-820 s
A-827 32 Hz
A-827 p
A-827 s
D-820
D-820 a
D-820 d
71C024
Studer
A-80VU
A80 16
A80 18
A-80-VU
71C025
Studer
A-800/1
A-800/3
A-800-I
A-800-III
A800
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix - 15
Appendix
Cable Reference Guide Continued
Lynx Transport Control Cables
Transport
Manufacturer
Machine
Model
Setup Menu
Description
Cable Type
Description
71C079
Studer
D-827
D-827
Lynx Serial
71C026
Tascam
40 Series
40
Tascam Type A
ATR-60
ATR-80
60
ATR-80
MSR-16
MSR-24
BR-20T
MSR-16
TimeLine
Part No.
Tascam Type B
71C035
Tascam
TSR-8
TSR-8
71C027
Tascam
50 Series
50
50 Series
71C079
Tascam
DA-88
DA-88
Lynx Serial
DA-60
DA-60
DA-800
DA800
Special Order
Tascam
DA-800
Key
a - non-release
d1 - Standard lock and release
d2 - Tight lock and release (digital dubbing)
ext - External 5850 interface
Hp - 512 Hz Tach/Parallel
Hs - 512 Hz Tach/Serial
int - L2 Internal 5850 interface
L - Layback
Lp - 32 Hz Tach/Parallel
Lpa - 32 Hz Tach/Parallel/Non-release
Lpd - 32 Hz Tach/Parallel/Standard lock and release
Ls - 32 Hz Tach/Serial
Lsa - 32 Hz Tach/Serial/Non-release
Lsd - 32 Hz Tach/Serial/Standard lock and
release
p - Parallel
s - Serial
v - Voltage control
This is an exact and accurate list of transports available at the current time. TimeLine reserves
the right to modify or update machines to this list when necessary.
Appendix - 16
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Auto Serial Transport Table
The transport selection AUTO Ser TRAN will automatically detect
the presence of most serial transports, and load the appropriate
transport parameters. The following table lists the serially controlled transports currently recognized, and shows the transport
selection that will be invoked when each transport is found.
Serial Transport
Sony BVH-2000
Sony BVH-2180
Sony BVH-2500
Sony BVH-2700
Sony BVH-2800
Sony BVH-2830
Sony BVH-3000
Sony BVH-3100
Sony BVU-800
Sony BVU-820
Sony BVU-850
Sony BVU-870
Sony BVU-900
Sony BVU-920
Sony BVU-950
Sony VO-9800
Sony VO-9850
Sony BVW-10
Sony BVW-40
Sony BVW-11
Sony BVW-15
Sony BVW-60
Sony BVW-65
Sony BVW-95
Sony BVW-96
Sony BVW-70
Sony BVW-75
Sony PVW-2600
Sony PVW-2800
Sony PVW-2650
TRAN Selection
SONY
BVH-2000
SONY
BVH-2000
SONY
BVH-2000
SONY
BVH-2000
SONY
BVH-2000
SONY
BVH-2000
SONY
BVH-2000
SONY
BVH-2000
SONY
BVU-800s
SONY
BVU-800s
SONY
BVU-800s
SONY
BVU-800s
SONY
BVU-950
SONY
BVU-950
SONY
BVU-950
SONY
9800
SONY
9800
SONY
BVW-10
SONY
BVW-40
SONY
BVW-10
SONY
BVW-10
SONY
BVW-75
SONY
BVW-75
SONY
BVW-75
SONY
BVW-75
SONY
BVW-75
SONY
BVW-75
SONY
BVW-75
SONY
BVW-75
SONY
BVW-75
Serial Transport
TRAN Selection
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Sony BVW-D75
Sony DVR-1000
Sony DVR-2000
Sony DVR-2100
Sony DVR-10
Sony DVR-18
Sony DVR-20
Sony DVR-28
Sony PCM-3402
Sony PCM-7030
Sony PCM-7050
Sony EVO-9800
Sony EVO-9850
Alesis AI2
JVC CR-850
Fostex D-20
Otari DTR-90
Panasonic AG-7750
Panasonic AJ-D350
Tascam DA-88
Ampex VPR-80
Ampex VPR-3
Ampex VPR-6
Ampex XVR-80
Ampex VPR-300
Ampex VPR-305
Ampex VPR-350
Ampex VPR-200
Ampex VPR-250
Ampex DCT-700d
SONY
SONY
SONY
SONY
SONY
SONY
SONY
SONY
SONY
SONY
SONY
SONY
SONY
ALESIS
JVC
FOSTEX
OTARI
PANA
PANA
TASCAM
AMPEX
AMPEX
AMPEX
AMPEX
AMPEX
AMPEX
AMPEX
AMPEX
AMPEX
AMPEX
BVW-75
DVR-1000
DVR-1000
DVR-1000
DVR-10
DVR-10
DVR-10
DVR-10
3402 sd
7030
7030
9800
9800
AI2/ADAT
CR-850s
D-20
DTR-90
AG-7750
AJ-D350
DA-88
VPR-80
VPR-3
VPR-6
VPR-80
VPR-300
VPR-300
VPR-300
VPR-300
VPR-300
VPR-300
Appendix - 17
Appendix
Appendix - 18
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Keyboard Control Unit Modifications
Keyboard Control Unit Hardware Upgrade
Service Bulletin No. 91-003
Description:
When a Keyboard Control Unit (KCU) is used with Lynx-2
modules, the KCU processor board must be modified for the
system to operate correctly. Failure to perform this modification
will cause operational errors.
Required Tools:
Static safe workstation
Grounding wrist strap
Soldering iron
Phillips screwdriver
X-acto Knife
30 AWG Wire
Procedure:
1. Turn off the power to the KCU power supply. Disconnect all
cables.
2. Place the KCU on a static safe workstation. Ground yourself
and the workstation anti-static mat.
3. Remove the two phillips screws holding the PROM cover to the
chassis. (Figure A-1) Remove the cover by lifting up, out and
sideways.
Figure A-1. Remove the PROM Cover
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix - 19
Appendix
Figure A-2. KCU Board Modifications
Appendix - 20
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix
4. Turn the KCU over and remove the four phillips screws
holding the bottom cover to the KCU chassis. Remove the
bottom cover. It is not necessary to remove the PC boards form
the chassis.
5. Referring to Figure A-2, cut the trace connecting the two
flowthrough holes. These holes are located next to RN3.
6. Solder a 30 AWG jumper wire between the top flowthrough
hole and pin 10 of U10 as shown in Figure A-2.
7. Examine the trace between pins 7 and 8 of U10. If this trace
has been cut, there will be a wire jumper between pins 8 and
14. Remove the jumper between pins 8 and 14 and solder a 30
AWG wire between pins 7 and 8.
8. Replace the bottom cover on the KCU chassis. Insert and
tighten the four phillips screws to secure the cover to the
chassis.
9. Set the KCU upright in its normal operating position.
10. Replace the PROM cover. Insert and tighten the two phillips
screws. Note, using too much forward pressure when
installing the screws could damage the KCU bottom cover.
Reconnect the cables and turn on the power.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix - 21
Appendix
Appendix - 22
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Lynx-2 Film Option Card PCB Modifications
Service Bulletin No. SB94-004
Description:
The following modifications must be performed to bring the film
card up to Rev. 2E PCB specifications. this update is required for
operation of V700-10 and LFI-001 software.
Require Tools:
Static safe workstation
Grounding wrist strap
30 GA Black wire wrap wire
Phillips screwdriver
Soldering iron
Procedure:
Disassembly
1. Remove the power cord and all other cables from the back
panel.
2. Place the unit on a static safe workstation.
3. Remove the six phillips screws from the top cover, and remove.
(See Figure A-3)
Figure A-3. Removing the Top Cover
4. Remove the phillips screw securing the film board to the metal
standoff. (See Figure A-4)
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix - 23
Appendix
5. Disconnect the ribbon cable at J7. (See Figure A-4) Compress
the two plastic standoffs and remove the film board from the
module.
Figure A-4. Standoff Locations
Appendix - 24
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix
6. On the solder side of the film board, locate DH2 and DH4.
Using the 30 GA black wire wrap wire, solder a jumper
between DH2 Pin 5 and DH4 Pin 7. (See Figure A-5)
Figure A-5. Jumper Location
Assembly
7. Replace the board in the module, aligning with the two plastic
standoffs. Make sure that the front panel ribbon cable in
connector J9 is not trapped under the film board.
8. Connect the ribbon cable to J7 on the main board.
9. Press down on the option board, properly seating it on the two
plastic standoffs.
10. Insert the phillips screw from Step 4 and secure the film board
to the metal standoff.
11. Replace the top cover. Insert and tighten the six phillips
screws. Reconnect the cables and turn on the power.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix - 25
Appendix
Appendix - 26
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Glossary
24
'24' refers to both the film-standard speed and code type.
25
'25' refers to both the EBU/PAL speed and code type.
29.97
'29.97' refers to a SMPTE frame rate only, in frames-per-second.
30
'30' refers to a SMPTE frame rate only, in frames-per-second.
Address
SMPTE/EBU time code address. Also referred to as time code
value. A specific and unique address in the time code data stream.
A set of SMPTE or EBU time code numbers indicating a specific
position on tape. A complete SMPTE address includes hours,
minutes, seconds, and frames.
ADR
Automated Dialog Replacement. A technique for replacing
production dialog in the studio.
Analog Audio
The "traditional" means of recording and reproducing sound, using
fluctuating electronic voltages to replicate audio waveforms.
ATR
Audio Tape Recorder.
Autolocator
A device that can hold multiple tape locations in memory and
chase to those locations on command, using SMPTE addresses,
tach pulses, or control track pulses to find a desired point on tape.
Binary Numerical
System
A system for expressing numerical values using two digits,
0 and 1. The binary system is used in digital audio, SMPTE,
MIDI, and other microprocessor-related data formats.
Biphase Encoding
The way in which SMPTE time code gets encoded onto tape.
It expresses binary '1' and binary '0'.
Biphase encoding reverses the signal polarity halfway through a
bit to represent a '1' and leaves the bit polarity unchanged to
represent a '0'.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix - 27
Appendix
Blanking Interval
The blanking interval occurs at the end of a frame. Video
information is absent during the blanking interval. The interval
occurs when the CRT electron gun scanner goes from the bottom
right corner of the screen to the beginning of the next field in the
top left corner.
BNC
Bayonet-Nut Coupler.
Byte
A byte is made up of two or more bits, which can be either a 0 or 1.
A group of related binary data or a word that can be read,
interpreted, and acted on by a microprocessor.
Code Type
See Time Code Type.
Configuration
See Setup Mode. The process of defining the user-selected
operational parameters, such as defining a specific transport or
lifter-defeat mode.
Control Track
A synchronizing signal on the edge of a tape, which provides a
reference for tracking control and tape speed.
DAW
Digital Audio Workstation. Usually refers to a computer-based,
hard disk recording and editing environment.
DF
Drop frame. See drop frame.
Digital Audio
A means of storing and transmitting sound using binary digits to
replicate the audio waveforms.
Display
Numeric display. Time Code/Message Display.
Drop Frame
Drop frame is one of the two SMPTE code types, and is the NTSC
color television standard. When using this code type, 108 specific
frame numbers are "dropped" for each hour of time code. See
Appendix -A for more detailed time code information.
EBU
EBU time code is 25 frame running at 25 fps.
Edit Decision
List (EDL)
A list, either on paper or in computer memory, of time code
addresses indicating successive scenes of source video footage that
will make up a complete program.
EDL
See Edit Decision List.
ERR
Error or offset error. Indicates that the display shows the
difference between the actual position of the machine in relation to
where it should be.
Foley
The process of adding incidental sounds, such a footsteps, door
slams, etc., to a video program or motion picture.
Appendix - 28
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix
Format
See Time Code Format.
Frame
A single image on a motion picture film or a television picture
formed from two interlaced fields. One complete video scanning
cycle, one complete SMPTE time code word.
Frame Lock
Frame lock syncs the Master and Slave(s) using all of the
information available in the reference TCA. The Phase 0 option
off, sets the module into Frame lock mode.
Frame Rate
The number of frames that go by in one second of audio, film or
video tape. Film and different types of video all have different
frame rates.
30
NTSC
PAL
Film
30 fr/s
29.97 fr/s
25 fr/s
24 fr/s
Monochrome TV, & audio
Color videotape, TV operations
European TV, European Broadcast, & audio
Film cameras & projectors
GEN REF
Generator reference. May also be referred to as reference source.
Generate
Indicates the process of activating the time code generator so that
time code is available at the rear panel GEN OUT jack.
Generator
Indicates a time code generator. Each Lynx-2 module has a time
code generator. This generator receives its speed reference from
one of 5 internal or external sources.
Guard Band
A track of multitrack tape adjacent to the sync track (such as
SMPTE or Control Track), which is left unrecorded in order to
prevent the time code from bleeding onto the audio program
material.
HH:MM:SS:FF
Hours:Minutes:Seconds:Frames. A SMPTE time code address or
value.
Initialize
Completely clear the module's RAM. Press and hold the [CLR]
key while you power-up the module.
Jam Sync
A technique used to start a time code generator from another
running time code. It can be used to recreate missing time code or
to add time code onto a tape.
Jam Time Code
The Jam Time Code or Jam Sync function. Picks up the next
consecutive address after a problem and generates new,
continuous code.
KCU
Keyboard Control Unit. TimeLine's external machine control unit.
The KCU provides centrally-controlled access to all modules in a
system.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix - 29
Appendix
Local Transport
The machine or transport that the Lynx-2 module is connected to
and controlling. See Synchronized Units.
Lock
The transport has synchronized with the system reference [GEN
REF].
LTC
Longitudinal Time Code. Time code information encoded in binary
coded decimal (BCD) form which is recorded as an audio signal on
a designated track of a VTR or an ATR.
Machine
Machine refers to the generic concept of tape or hard disk-based
record/playback hardware.
MIDI
Musical Instrument Digital Interface. This serial data language is
used by microprocessors in synthesizers, sequencers, drum
machines, signal processors, and computers. It provides musical
pitch and rhythm information, synthesizer performance
parameters, song position markers, stop/start/continue commands
for sequencers and computers, and synchronizing data called
MIDI Clock, which is based on 24 pulses per quarter-note. MIDI
is frequently used with SMPTE for sync-to-tape functions.
MIDI is transmitted between microprocessors at 32.125 kBits per
second. It can also be used by lighting systems and mixing
consoles.
MTC
MIDI Time Code.
N/A
Not available. Not active. Not applicable.
Non Drop Frame
NDF or ND is one of the two SMPTE code types and is the black &
white television standard. When using this code type, every frame
of time code is counted in real time. See Appendix -A for more
time code information.
Non-contiguous
Not a continuous, predictable sequence. i.e., 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9 is a
non-contiguous number sequence.
NTSC
A system of coding color information for television transmission
used primarily in the USA and Japan. Named after the National
Television System Committee.
Offset
Offset is the difference between two time codes at the point at
which they are to be synchronized. Offsets are subframe-accurate
and are displayed using the HH:MM:SS:FF format. Offsets are
always applied to the slave modules.
PAL
Phase Alternate Line. PAL is another name for the 25 time code
format, which is the standard for European color and B&W
television.
Appendix - 30
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix
Phase Lock
A mode of synchronizer operation that uses phase information
derived from SMPTE time code and, after initial synchronization,
ignores specific frame addresses. It is also called Sync Lock.
On the Lynx-2, the Phase 1 option sets the module in the Phase or
Sync lock mode. This mode precisely synchronizes the Slave(s) to
the Master using the phase information contained in the time
code's 16-bit Sync Word. The synchronizer ignores the master's
absolute TCA values.
Pilot Tone
The Pilot output signal is a sinusoidally-shaped output, which is
always 2 times the frame rate of the time code that is being
referenced or generated.
Post-production
Activities that take place after the raw footage has been shot for a
video program or motion picture. Includes video editing and a
number of audio processes, such as ADR, Foley, and mixing.
Production
The initial stages in the making of a film or television program,
which includes the shooting of raw footage and recording of
production audio.
RAM
Random Access Memory. The module's configuration parameters
are stored in battery-backed RAM. And recalled each time the
unit is turned on.
Rate
Frame rate or speed. See Frame Rate or Speed.
REF SRC
Reference source. The signal that is used to determine the rate
that the generator and synchronizer will run at. The reference
source can be thought of as the system time base. The reference
source can be internal crystal, external video, MAINS, or external
pilot tone or the time code reader.
Register
The generator register is the module's memory buffer that holds
numeric time code values that are entered or captured. The Lynx2 module also has reader, sync point, offset, user bit and error
registers.
Reshape
The output signal is the same as the input signal, but it has been
reshaped with correct risetime values and a fixed voltage output.
This type of output does not correct for Bit or timing errors.
Resolving
A technique for regulating the play speed of a tape machine by
matching the rate of pulses recorded on tape with a pulse rate
from another stable source or a master tape machine.
Sequencer
A device that can record performance data for synthesizers and
other electronic instruments and then, on playback, pass that data
on to the instruments so that they'll play what has been recorded.
Modern sequencers use MIDI as their communications protocol.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix - 31
Appendix
SER
SERial port. SER LED lights when time code data is connected to
one of the rear panel serial ports.
Setup Mode
The process of defining the user-selected operational parameters,
such as defining a specific transport or lifter-defeat mode.
Shuttle
Fast-wind. Fast-forward or Rewind.
SMPTE
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers. An industry
standards committee. The group responsible for developing
SMPTE time code.
Speed
Speed, Frame Rate and Rate are synonymous. Time code speed is
counted in frames per second (fps). SMPTE time code has two
speeds: 30fps and 29.97fps.
SUBF UBITS
Sub frame user bits.
Sync Lock
See Phase Lock.
Sync Word
Included at the end of every 80-bit time code word is a 16-bit Sync
Word. The sync word provides direction and Phase-lock speed
information, and marks the end of each time code word.
Synchronized Unit
A synchronized unit consists of one machine and one Lynx-2
module. See Local Transport.
Synchronizer
A device that reads time codes recorded on two or more tape
machines, compares the codes, and adjusts the machine's tape
positions and speeds based on the results of that comparison.
System BUS
When two or more Lynx-2 modules are used to form a system, a
communications link must be established between the modules.
This is done by looping from one module to the next, via the RS422
ports on the rear panel of the module.
TCA
Time Code Address. The HH:MM:SS:FF bits of the TC word.
TCG
See Time Code Generator.
Time Code Format
Time code format defines both the frame rate and code type being
used. Example: To describe a time code format as 30NDF is to
say that the frame rate is 30fps and the code type is non-drop
frame. Simply saying either 30 or drop frame defines only part of
the SMPTE time code.
Time Code
Generator
A special signal generator designed to generate and transmit
SMPTE time code at one of the international formats and rates.
Time Code Reader
A counter designed to read and display SMPTE time code.
Appendix - 32
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix
Time Code Type
The word "type" is the key to understanding this phrase. Type
defines the counting method that is employed by the TCM. There
are two SMPTE types: 30 (also called non-drop "ND" or non-drop
frame "NDF") and DF (drop frame). EBU and film types are the
same as their respective speeds, 25 and 24.
Toggle
To toggle is to consecutively press a key several times in order to
step through a series of choices.
Transport
Transport refers to a part or subassembly of a machine, i.e., a
transport connector or a transport cable.
TRS
Tip - Ring - Sleeve. A 1/4", balanced termination plug or jack.
Typically wired T = +, R = -, S = shield.
Type
See Time Code Type.
UB
See User Bit.
User Bit
Each time code frame or word consists of 80 bits that convey
SMPTE/EBU time code information. Thirty-two of those bits are
user bits, and are available for storing information such as IDs,
reel numbers, session dates or another time code number.
Value
Values are generally time code addresses. They may also be a
custom user bit IDs.
Video Sync
A reference video signal generated by an extremely stable source.
This signal is used to control the speed of video machines, digital
audio machines and is used as a timing reference to ensure
accurate synchronization.
Virtual Tracks
Used to describe any circumstance whereby the method for
reproducing audio tracks is not directly analogous to the linear
tape track format. Hard disk systems (DAW's) and MIDI
sequencers are typical examples.
MIDI performance commands can be stored in a sequencer.
Because the sequencer can "play" these parts in real time,
synchronized to tape, they can be regarded as extra or "virtual"
tracks, not on the tape, but present nonetheless.
VITC
Vertical Interval Time Code. An alternative to the LTC format of
SMPTE time code. It is recorded in the blanking interval of the
video signal, which is not used for the picture.
VSO
Variable Speed Override. Variable Speed Oscillator.
VTR
Video Tape Recorder.
Workstation
See DAW.
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix - 33
Appendix
Appendix - 34
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Technical Information
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix - 35
Appendix
Appendix - 36
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Appendix
Circuit Board Interface
50-pin Transport Connector
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Ground
Transport ground sense
Stop (still) command
Capstan frequency output
N/C
Lifter drop command
Fast forward/direction command
Record tally
Auxiliary in 2
Lock Light or Ch 4 insert command
Channel 1 insert command
Rehearse command
Servo relay-A N/C
Servo relay-B common
Servo relay-B N/O
RS422 (-)/RS232 TX (-)
N/C
+5V (50 mA max)
Record-off command collector (+)
Search command collector (+)
Adaptor Detect
AUX Out Opto
Transport command common
Rewind command
Play tally
Tach direction sense
Channel 2 insert command
Video insert command or Ch 3
Servo relay-A N/O
Servo relay A common
Servo relay-B N/C
RS422 TX (+)
N/C
Ground
Record-off command emitter (-)
Search command emitter (-)
Play command
Search volts out
Capstan volts out
Record-on command
Auxiliary in 1
Tach pulse in
AUX Out O/C
-12V (50 mA max)
+12V (50 mA max)
Mute relay N/O
Mute relay N/C
Mute relay common
RS422 RCV (-)/RS232 RCV (-)
RS422 RCV (+)
Relay or I/O Device
U16B, U17B
U5F
U18D, U19D
U16C, U17C
U15C
U14B
U27
U20B, U21B
U27
K1
K1
K1
JP2, U40
U18B, U19B
U18A, U19A
U20D, U21D
U16D, U17D
U15D
U15B
U20C, U21C
U20A, U21A
K1
K1
K1
JP2, U40
U18B, U19B
U18A, U19A
U18C, U19C
U44A
U45C
U16A, U17A
U14A
U15A
U27
K2
K2
K2
U40
U40
Appendix - 37
Appendix
Appendix - 38
Lynx-2 Time Code Module
09/07/00
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising